Lexus ES350, ES350 2012 Owner's manual

Lexus ES350, ES350 2012 Owner's manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Air conditioning
• Rear view monitor system
1
Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys ...................................................... 26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start .......................... 28
Wireless remote control .............. 40
Doors.................................................... 42
Trunk..................................................... 46
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats......................................... 50
Driving position memory .............. 51
Seat position memory ................... 55
Head restraints................................. 57
Seat belts ............................................ 59
Steering wheel.................................. 65
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ................................................ 66
Outside rear view mirrors........... 68
2
• Audio/video system
• Climate control
• Intuitive parking assist
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................................ 70
Moon roof .......................................... 73
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 78
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system.......... 81
Alarm.................................................... 83
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............... 86
SRS airbags ...................................... 88
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................... 99
Child restraint systems ............... 104
Installing child restraints............. 108
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage...................... 192
Vehicle load limits......................... 195
Winter driving tips ........................ 196
1
Trailer towing................................. 202
Dinghy towing ............................... 203
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 120
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 128
Automatic Transmission ............ 132
Turn signal lever ............................ 135
Parking brake ................................. 136
Horn.................................................... 137
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ..................... 138
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 140
Multi-information display........... 144
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch............................ 149
Fog light switch .............................. 154
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 156
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ................................ 160
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................. 164
Intuitive parking assist ................. 176
Driving assist systems.................. 182
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ............ 187
3
2
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
3
Automatic air conditioning
system ............................................ 206
Rear window and outside
4
rear view mirror
defoggers ...................................... 213
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type ........................ 214 5
Using the radio................................ 217
Using the CD player................... 224
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs................................... 231 6
Operating an iPod....................... 238
Operating a USB memory....... 245
Optimal use of the audio
7
system ............................................ 254
Using the AUX port ................... 256
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............................ 257
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio
system
Bluetooth® audio system ........ 260
Using the Bluetooth® audio
system ............................................ 263
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player........ 268
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.......... 271
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ............................................... 278
3-4. Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phone)
Hands-free system for
mobile phones ............................ 279
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phone)................... 283
Making a phone call..................... 291
Setting a mobile phone.............. 296
Security and system setup......... 301
Using the phone book............... 305
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............................. 312
• Interior lights ................................ 314
• Personal lights ............................. 314
4
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features................ 315
• Glove box ..................................... 316
• Console box................................. 317
• Overhead console .................... 318
• Cup holders.................................. 319
• Auxiliary box ................................ 321
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors......................................... 322
Vanity mirror.................................. 323
Clock................................................. 324
Ashtray ............................................. 325
Cigarette lighter........................... 326
Power outlet................................... 327
Seat heaters................................... 328
Seat heaters and ventilators ... 330
Armrest ............................................ 332
Rear sunshade............................... 333
Extended trunk............................. 335
Coat hooks ..................................... 336
Floor mat.......................................... 337
Trunk features............................... 338
Garage door opener................. 340
Compass........................................... 346
Safety Connect ............................ 350
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 358
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................... 361
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 364
General maintenance................ 366
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ...................................... 369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 370
Hood.................................................. 374
Positioning a floor jack............... 375
Engine compartment.................. 377
Tires .................................................. 390
Tire inflation pressure................. 399
Wheels............................................. 403
Air conditioning filter................. 405
Electronic key battery................ 407
Checking and replacing
fuses............................................... 409
Headlight aim ................................. 418
Light bulbs....................................... 420
5
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
1
Emergency flashers ................... 430
If your vehicle needs to be
towed .............................................. 431
If you think something is
2
wrong ............................................. 437
Fuel pump shut off system ....... 438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................................ 439
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 449
If you have a flat tire...................... 461
If the engine will not start .......... 470
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.............................. 472
If you lose your keys.................... 473
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ............... 474
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 477
If your vehicle overheats .......... 480
If the vehicle becomes
stuck............................................... 483
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency...... 484
5
4
5
6
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
Index
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).................... 486
Fuel information............................ 496
Tire information............................. 499
6-2. Customization
Customizable features.................. 511
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ............................ 519
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................... 522
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 523
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 525
6
Index
Abbreviation list................................... 536
Alphabetical index ............................. 538
What to do if... ...................................... 550
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Pictorial index
Exterior
Windshield wipers P. 156
Moon roof P. 73
Outside rear view
mirrors P. 68
Hood P. 374
Turn signal lights
P. 135
Side marker lights P. 149
Parking lights P. 149
Turn signal lights P. 135
Fog lights P. 154
Headlights (low beam) P. 149
Headlights (high beam) and daytime running lights
P. 149, 152
8
Rear window defogger P. 213
Side marker lights P. 149
Doors P. 42
Trunk P. 46
Tires
P. 390
●Rotation
P. 461
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure P. 493
Tail lights P. 149
Turn signal lights P. 135
Fuel filler door P. 78
9
Pictorial index
Interior
SRS front passenger airbag P. 88
SRS knee airbags P. 88
Floor mat P. 337
Power window switches P. 70
SRS driver airbag P. 88
Console box P. 317
Seat belts P. 59
A
Armrest P. 332
Cup holders P. 319
Front seats P. 50
SRS side airbags P. 88
Power outlet P. 327
AUX port P. 256
USB port P. 238, 245
Head restraints P. 57
10
*1
A
Compass P. 346
Moon roof switches P. 73
“SOS” button P. 350
Garage door opener switches P. 340
Personal/interior lights P. 314
Personal lights P. 314
SRS curtain shield
airbags P. 88
Coat hooks P. 336
Vanity mirrors P. 323
Sun visors P. 322
Overhead console P. 318
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 66
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
11
Pictorial index
Interior
B
Inside door lock button P. 42
Driving position memory switches P. 51
Seat position memory switches P. 55
Door lock switch P. 42
Window lock switch P. 70
Power window switches P. 70
12
C
Automatic transmission shift lever P. 132
Seat heater switches P. 328
Seat heater and ventilator switches P. 330
Shift lock override button P. 472
Cigarette lighter P. 326
Ashtray P. 325
Cup holders P. 319
: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Headlight switch P. 149
Turn signal lever P. 135
Fog light switch P. 154
Multi-information display P. 144
Gauges and meters P. 138
Windshield wiper and
washer switch P. 156
Engine (ignition) switch P. 128
Trunk opener main switch P. 46
Glove box P. 316
Tire pressure warning select switch P. 393
“AFS OFF” switch P. 151
Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 392
Horn P. 137
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 65
Audio remote control switches P. 257 *1
Parking brake pedal P. 136
Hood lock release lever P. 374
14
A
Without navigation system
Clock P. 324
Security indicator
P. 81, 83
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers P. 213
Air conditioning
system P. 206
Emergency flasher
switch P. 430
Audio system
P. 214
With navigation system
Security indicator
Emergency flasher
switch P. 430
P. 81, 83
Clock P. 324
Navigation system*
2
Air conditioning
system*2
Audio system*2
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
P. 213
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
15
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
B
Distance switch  P. 166
Telephone switch P. 284
*1
“DISP” switch P. 145
Talk switch P. 284
Cruise control switch P. 160, 164
16
*1
C
Type A
Outside rear view mirror switch P. 68
VSC off switch P. 183
Instrument panel light
control P. 139
Intuitive parking assist
switch P. 176 *1
Rear sunshade
switch P. 333
Auxiliary box P. 321
Trunk opener P. 46
Fuel filler door opener P. 78
Type B
Outside rear view mirror switch P. 68
VSC off switch P. 183
Instrument panel light
control P. 139
Rear sunshade
switch P. 333
Auxiliary box P. 321
Trunk opener P. 46
Fuel filler door opener P. 78
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
17
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
18
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
19
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
Vehicle control and operation data recording
Your Lexus is equipped with sophisticated computers that record certain information about your vehicle’s operation, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The data recorded varies according to the grade level and options the vehicle is
equipped with. The computers do not record conversations, sound or pictures.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
20
● Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder
(EDR) that records data in a crash or near crash event.
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or near crash event,
this device may record the following information:
• Engine speed
• Whether the brake pedal was depressed or not
• Vehicle speed
• To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
• The transmission shift position
• Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
• Driver’s seat position
• SRS airbag deployment data
• SRS airbag system diagnostic data
• Front passenger’s occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle
safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
data such as conversation between passengers.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased
vehicle) is obtained
• Officially requested to by the police or other authorities
• Necessary, for use as a defense for Lexus in a lawsuit
• Ordered to by a court of law
However, if necessary, Lexus will:
• Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details
of the vehicle owner, and that only when deemed necessary
• Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a nonLexus organization for research purposes
21
● Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a mobile phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing
with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can
be fatal to children.
22
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
23
24
Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys............................................... 26
1
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.......................... 70
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start................... 28
Wireless remote control........ 40
Moon roof ................................... 73
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 78
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Doors ............................................ 42
Engine immobilizer system..... 81
Trunk ............................................. 46
Alarm............................................ 83
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.................................. 50
Driving position memory......... 51
Seat position memory.............. 55
Head restraints .......................... 57
Seat belts ..................................... 59
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 86
SRS airbags ................................ 88
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............. 99
Child restraint systems ......... 104
Installing child restraints....... 108
Steering wheel........................... 65
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 66
Outside rear view mirrors...... 68
25
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 28)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 40)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF and lock the glove box and the armrest
door as circumstances demand. (P. 46, 316, 335)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 473)
26
1-1. Key information
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by
placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that
blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
● Do not disassemble the electronic key.
27
Before driving
NOTICE
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 29)
Unlocks the trunk (P. 29)
Starts the engine (P. 128)
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the driver's door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger's door handle to unlock all the
doors. *
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 33)
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Pressing and holding the button
closes the windows and standard
moon roof.
Unlocking the trunk
Press and hold the button to
unlock the trunk.
29
Before driving
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna outside trunk
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
31
1
Before driving
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
any of the outside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows
and standard moon roof are operating.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the
door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once
more.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start and
wireless remote control from operating properly:
(Ways of coping: P. 474)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, mobile phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and
hold
,
, or
on the key.
for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information
display
Unlocking doors
Beep
Hold the driver's door handle
to unlock only the driver's
Exterior: Beeps three
door
times
Hold the door handle except Interior: Pings once
a driver’s door handle to
unlock all doors
Hold any door handle to
unlock all doors
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been
changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 83)
33
1
Before driving
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
● When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 40)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 474)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 458)
● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always receives radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 407)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
•
•
•
•
•
•
34
TVs
Personal computers
Mobile phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging mobile phones or cordless phones
Glass top ranges
Table lamps
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside
the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors
from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
35
1
Before driving
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in
response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 449)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds
Situation
Correction procedure
Tried to lock the doors using
the entry function while the
electronic key is still inside
the passenger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
the trunk and all doors are
locked
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Tried to exit the vehicle with
Exterior alarm
the electronic key and lock
sounds once for 60 the doors without first turning
seconds
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm
Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors
sounds once for 10 the entry function while a
and lock the doors
seconds
door is open
again.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Correction procedure
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, an attempt was made Shift the shift lever to P.
to open the door and exit the
vehicle, and the shift lever
was not in P.
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode while the
driver's door is open
(Opened the driver's door
Interior alarm pings when the “ENGINE START
continuously
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF while the Close the driver's door.
driver's door is open
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 474)
● Starting the engine:P. 128
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 407
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 511)
37
1
Before driving
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 3
seconds and interior alarm sounds
continuously
Situation
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the USA
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-3
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14AEM
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
39
1
Before driving
from the smart access system antennas. (P. 30)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
standard moon roof (push
and hold)*
Unlocks the trunk
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm
(push and hold) (P. 83)
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the
door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once
more.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 34
■ Security feature
P. 36
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 407
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 32
1
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Before driving
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 511)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the USA
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14AEM
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■ Entry function
P. 28
■ Wireless remote control
P. 40
■ Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
locks are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
43
Before driving
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions (vehicles without a navigation
system only)
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10
seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch (
or
) for
approximately 5 seconds and then
release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
Function
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
P
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
1
■ Using the mechanical key
Before driving
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 474)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 511)
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Release the trunk lid.
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function
P. 28
Wireless remote control
P. 40
Locking the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove
box OFF to disable the trunk
opener.
ON
OFF
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the trunk opener, the
wireless remote control or the
entry function.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
1
Before driving
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling the
trunk opener main switch
P. 26
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in
the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk
lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
1
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.
49
Before driving
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
Seat leg support adjusting switch (driver’s seat) (if equipped)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce
the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (driver’s seat)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.
1
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
Push the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds push button 1
or 2 until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push button 1 or 2 to recall the
memorized position.
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the following.
Carry only the key to which you want to link the driving position. If 2 or
more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.
Using the wireless remote control
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the
driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
STEP 2
(1 or 2), press
on the wireless remote control until the signal
beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a door
once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is not opened
within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be locked again
and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 83)
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver's
door is opened.
53
Before driving
Using the door lock switch
STEP 1 Close the driver's door and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF.
While pressing the desired button
STEP 2
(1 or 2), press the lock or unlock
side on the driver’s door lock
switch until the signal beeps.
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Carry only the key whose linked operation is to be canceled.
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
STEP 2 Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the “SET” button, press
on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press the
lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up
to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
● Push the “SET” button.
● Push button 1 or 2.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat)
Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and
recalled with the touch of a button.
Two different seat positions can be entered into memory.
1
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
Push the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds push button 1
or 2 until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Push button 1 or 2 to recall the
memorized position.
: If equipped
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Retained accessory power
Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger
door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
● Push the “SET” button.
● Push button 1 or 2.
● Adjust the seat position using the switches.
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
1
Down
Before driving
Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
■ Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
■ Installing the head restraints
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
1
Before driving
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision.
The pretensioner does not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact, a rear
impact or a vehicle rollover.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt using a motor, thus enhancing the
effectiveness of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 108)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 59)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
61
Before driving
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 187)
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 104)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 59 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
1
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 60)
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
63
Before driving
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
1
Before driving
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In AUTO mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.
Turns AUTO mode ON/OFF
The indicator comes on when
AUTO mode is turned ON.
The anti-glare mirror default
mode is AUTO. The anti-glare
mirror is automatically set to
AUTO whenever the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
on.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover it.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
1
Before driving
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select a mirror to adjust
(L: left or R: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 213)
■ Folding back the mirrors
Push back in the direction of the vehicle's
rear.
■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch
of a button. (P. 51)
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between L and
R).
1
■ Auto anti-glare function
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
69
Before driving
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to AUTO mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P. 66)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
70
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Linked door lock window operation
1
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 474)
■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.
71
Before driving
● The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 28)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 511)
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
72
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■ Opening and closing
Standard type
1
Before driving
Open
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened position.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close
Push the switch in either direction
to stop the moon roof partway.
Glass type
Open
Close (push and hold)
The moon roof stops once. Push
and hold the switch again to fully
close.
73
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ Tilting up and down
Standard type
Tilt up
Tilt down
Push the switch to either side to
stop the moon roof partway.
Glass type
Tilt up
Push the switch to either side to
stop the moon roof partway.
Tilt down (push and hold)
74
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Linked door lock moon roof operation (standard type)
1
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 474)
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ To reduce moon roof wind noise (standard type)
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving
with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
75
Before driving
● The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 29)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “TILT” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt
up position and stops.
STEP 3 Release the “TILT” switch once and then press and hold the “TILT” switch
again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
1:
* If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “TILT”
switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second.
Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is
completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure
correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
76
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 511)
1
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
77
Before driving
■ Opening the moon roof
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
78
STEP 1
Open the fuel filler door.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
■ Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch because the battery is
discharged or for any other reason.
79
Before driving
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
1
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
80
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
1
Before driving
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
81
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the USA
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
82
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
1
Before driving
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function or wireless remote control. (The
doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all the doors
using the entry function or wireless remote control. The system
will be set automatically after
30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function or wireless
remote control.
● Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
83
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● The doors are unlocked using the mechani-
cal key.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood.
● The battery is recharged or replaced when
the vehicle is locked.
84
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Panic mode
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
■ When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system.
If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered
when the battery is reconnected.
■ Alarm-operated door lock
● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent
intruders.
● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
85
1
Before driving
When
is pushed for longer than about
one second, the headlights/tail lights/emergency flashers will flash, the front and rear
interior lights will come on, and an alarm will
sound for about 60 seconds to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 50)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 50)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable. (P. 50)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(P. 65)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 57)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 59)
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
1
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position:
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
87
Before driving
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants and rear seat
outside occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.
88
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
1
Before driving
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG
OFF indicator lights
Side airbags for the front passengers
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors
Curtain shield airbag sensors
Side airbags for the rear outside passengers
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver's seat position sensor
Knee airbags
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
Front airbag sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
89
1-7. Safety information
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be
hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to
the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to
push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants
to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 350)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18
mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
90
1-7. Safety information
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact
that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the
vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the rear
● Collision from the side
● Vehicle rollover
91
Before driving
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
1
1-7. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Collision from the front
● Vehicle rollover
92
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the containing the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
93
1
Before driving
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the
way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining
the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
94
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 105)
95
1
Before driving
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver's airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be
sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 89.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
97
1
Before driving
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
98
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
1
With navigation system
Before driving
Without navigation system
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
99
1-7. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*2
Activated
■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
Indicator/
SRS
warning
light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
100
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
1-7. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
AIR BAG OFF
lights
SRS warning light
On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
101
1
Before driving
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
Not illuminated
lights
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 105)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 109)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of
collision.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
102
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 109)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
103
1
Before driving
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of the Canada and all 50 states of the USA now require the use of
child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 109)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat
104
1-7. Safety information
Forward facing  Convertible seat
1
Before driving
Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 59)
105
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
106
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
107
1
Before driving
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH anchors
or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 59)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
108
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Canada only
109
1
Before driving
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 2 Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the LATCH
anchorages.
STEP 3 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 2 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 3 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
Canada only
110
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
STEP 1
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
STEP 3
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
111
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down
into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child
seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward facing Convertible seat
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
STEP 3
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
112
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat is
securely in place.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
■ Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the seat
STEP 1
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 5
STEP 2
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 59)
113
1
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or the lower anchors, and
lock the head restraint in place at
the lowest position.
STEP 2
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
114
1-7. Safety information
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 61)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
115
Before driving
CAUTION
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Only put a forward facing or booster child
seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing or
booster child seat on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
116
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve
or accident.
117
1
Before driving
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
1-7. Safety information
118
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 120
2
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Engine (ignition) switch......... 128
Headlight switch ..................... 149
Automatic Transmission........ 132
Fog light switch ........................ 154
Turn signal lever....................... 135
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 156
Parking brake........................... 136
Horn ............................................ 137
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................ 138
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 140
Multi-information display..... 144
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control.......................... 160
Dynamic radar cruise
control ..................................... 164
Intuitive parking assist............ 176
Driving assist systems............ 182
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ....... 187
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ................ 192
Vehicle load limits................... 195
Winter driving tips.................. 196
Trailer towing .......................... 202
Dinghy towing......................... 203
119
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the engine (P. 128)
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 132)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 136)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N.
(P. 132)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 136)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 132)
STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
120
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
2
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
•
•
•
•
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 488)
121
When driving
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver
drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage
the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine
from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
122
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while
driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to
these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 484
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
123
2
When driving
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 132)
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Failure to do so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
124
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
125
2
When driving
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
NOTICE
■ While driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving.
If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator pedal
depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at
the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
2
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
When driving
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (P. 464)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, transaxle fluid, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and
the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
127
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■ Starting the engine
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
STEP 4
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine can be started from
any “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
2
ACCESSORY mode
When driving
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off the
engine, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will be turned to
ACCESSORY mode, not to
OFF.
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 81)
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
129
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever
in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 34
■ When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 407
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 32
■ Note for the entry function
P. 35
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
130
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
2
When driving
131
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic Transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode, depress the brake
pedal and move the shift
lever.
■ Shift position uses
132
Shift position
Function
P
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
S mode driving*2 (P. 133)
2-1. Driving procedures
*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the
driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended
for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.
2
Changing shift ranges in S mode
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to
vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if AI-SHIFT
has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. (P. 134)
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. However, the gear is limited according to selected shift range.
● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
133
When driving
Shift the shift lever to the S mode driving position and operate the shift
lever.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
■ When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control sys-
tem
The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4.
(P. 160, 164)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 472
■ If the
indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S
mode driving position
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same as manner as when the
shift lever is in D.)
■ S mode
● When the shift range is 5 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift
range to 6.
● To prevent excessive engine speed, a function was adopted that automatically
selects a higher shift range before engine speed becomes too high.
● To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically
selects a higher shift range when the fluid temperature is high.
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting
the shift lever to the S mode driving position cancels the function.)
The engine speed may remain high after releasing the accelerator pedal. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
134
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
2
When driving
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
135
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
Canada
USA
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal with
your right foot.
■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 196)
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
136
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
2
When driving
137
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Multi-information display
P. 144
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
138
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer and trip meter
● Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
● Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was
last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
2
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
When the headlight switch is
turned to ON, the brightness will
be reduced slightly unless the control dial is turned fully up.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In
this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after
it has cooled completely. (P. 480)
139
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
140
2-2. Instrument cluster
Center panel (without navigation system)
2
When driving
Center panel (with navigation system)
141
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 135)
* AFS OFF indicator light
(P. 151)
(if equipped)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 151)
* Slip indicator (P. 182)
Headlight indicator
(P. 149)
* VSC off indicator
(P. 183)
(USA)
*
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 149)
(without
navigation
system)
SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 100)
*
Front fog light indicator
(P. 154)
(with navigation system)
SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 100)
* Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 148)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 160, 164)
Cruise control “SET” indicator (P. 160, 164)
(if equipped)
142
Radar cruise control indicator (P. 164)
Shift position and shift range indicators (P. 132)
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions or suspected problem in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 439)
*
*
*
(USA)
*
*
(USA)
*
(Canada)
*
(Canada)
*
*
(USA)
*
(Canada)
*
(if equipped)
2
(with navigation system)
When driving
(without
navigation
system)
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning lights not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious
injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
143
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature.
● Trip information
(P. 145)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising
related information.
● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
(P. 176)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
(P. 164)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise control.
● Warning messages
(P. 449)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
144
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
Type A
Display items can be switched by
pushing the “DISP” switch.
2
Display items can be switched by
pushing the “DISP” switch.
Type C
Display items can be switched by
pushing the “DISP” switch.
145
When driving
Type B
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed in the following range.
USA: from -40 to 122 °F
Canada: from -40 to 50 °C
■ Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
When adding fuel, turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to off. In case fuel is added without
turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to off,
the display may not be updated.
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
• The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP”
switch for longer than one second when the average
fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
146
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■ Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
P. 148
■ Eco Driving Indicator Light customization
2
Eco Driving Indicator Light can be activated or deactivated by pressing the “DISP” switch for longer than 1
second when Eco Driving Indicator Light customization
screen is displayed.
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine
was started or the function was reset.
■ Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time since the engine was
started.
■ System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is
complete,
is displayed before returning to the normal screen.
147
When driving
Eco Driving Indicator Light can be deactivated. This
customization can only be performed when the vehicle is stopped.
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests Zone of Eco driving with current
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
Vehicle to exceed Zone of Eco driving, the
right of Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will blink and Eco Driving Indicator
Light will turn off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in
the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in anything other than D.
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80
mph (130 km/h) or higher.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
NOTICE
■ The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
148
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Type A
All lights (except daytime running lights)
turn off.
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
2
When driving
The headlights and all
lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The headlights, parking lights and daytime
running lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode)
149
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
All lights (except daytime running lights)
turn off.
USA Canada
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The headlights, parking lights and daytime
running lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode)
150
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
2
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
When driving
AFS (vehicles with discharge headlights)
AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of light axis of the
headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle
that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■ Deactivating AFS
Turn the switch OFF to deactivate
AFS.
OFF
ON
151
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on auto-
matically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking
brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight control system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after all doors are closed with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch switched to
ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off immediately if
the
button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
or
position.
OFF once and then back to the
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ If the
indicator flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights)
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
152
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 511)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
2
When driving
153
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights help improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in
rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low
beam.
Type A
To turn the front fog
lights off
To turn the front fog
lights on
154
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
To turn the front fog
lights off
To turn the front fog
lights on
2
When driving
155
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Type A
Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
156
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(With “AUTO” selected, after
operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after
a short delay to prevent dripping.)
2
Type B
When driving
Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
157
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(With “AUTO” selected, after
operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after
a short delay to prevent dripping.)
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Raindrop sensor
● The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or 5F
(-15C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate
the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
■ AUTO mode
If the wiper switch is turned to AUTO position while the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that AUTO
mode is activated.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
158
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subjected to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
2
■ When the windshield is dry
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
159
When driving
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
■ Setting the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
: If equipped
160
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
2
When driving
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
161
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by
first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever
down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
When driving
● On roads with sharp bends
2
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● During emergency towing
163
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicators
Display
Set speed
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
Cruise control switch
■ Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
STEP 1
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator
will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
: If equipped
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
2
When driving
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) each time the lever
is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75
seconds the lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) each time the
lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75
seconds the lever is held
165
2-4. Using other driving systems
In the constant speed control mode (P. 170), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes the
Preceding
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
vehicle mark
follows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle mark
will also be displayed.
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
166
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming the speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set
speed.
2
When driving
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up
to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicleto-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the
system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in
on the vehicle ahead.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied
169
When driving
Approach warning
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other
vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed control mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately one second.)
Constant speed control mode indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off and then turned
to IGNITION ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 165
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 167
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
2
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set
to the “AUTO” mode or the high speed wiper operation position).
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
171
When driving
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■ Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 449)
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
2
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
173
When driving
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice and snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● During emergency towing
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 169) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
2
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
When driving
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
175
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.
■ Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
■ Multi-information display (P. 144)
Front corner sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Back sensor operation
: If equipped
176
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Intuitive parking assist switch
ON/OFF
When ON, an indicator on the
switch comes on to inform the
driver that the function is operational.
2
■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) to
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
to 0.8 ft. (25 cm) from the
obstacle
Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
of the obstacle
177
When driving
The display and buzzer system
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the
obstacle
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.2 ft. (35 cm) from the obstacle
Flashing: Within 1.2 ft. (35 cm)
of the obstacle
■ Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously.
• Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
• Back sensors: Approximately 1.2 ft. (35 cm)
● When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the
buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
● If multiple obstacles are detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) in front and
behind the vehicle at the same time, the warning buzzer will change
in the following manner:
• If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detected
near a different area of the vehicle, the warning buzzer will sound
6 beeps then one continuous beep.
• If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detected
within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warning buzzer will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.
178
2-4. Using other driving systems
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles
that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
2
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
When driving
179
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
The sensor is frozen.
The sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-
lar attention to the following obstacles.
•
•
•
•
•
180
Wires, fences, ropes etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ When the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 449
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
When driving
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
2
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 511)
CAUTION
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
181
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning when
starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 188
When the VSC/TRAC systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the front wheels spin, the
slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/TRAC systems
have been engaged.
182
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off the TRAC system only
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the button.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.
■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the button
for more than 3 seconds while the
vehicle is stopped.
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display and VSC
off indicator light will come on.
Press the button again to turn the
systems back on.
183
When driving
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC off switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC /VSC systems after turning off the engine
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will automatically
reactivate them.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off,
the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC and TRAC function. Contact your Lexus
dealer.
184
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or
serious injury:
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-
tions
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
185
When driving
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When the slip indicator flashes
This situation occurs immediately while VSC is activated. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help enhance vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn
the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
186
2-4. Using other driving systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the pre-collision system such as the brake assist and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage.
■ Pre-collision seat belts
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 61)
2
When driving
However, when the VSC systems are disabled, the system will not operate
in the event of skidding.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
: If equipped
187
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,
trees, or snowdrifts.
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belt (type A)
• Vehicle speed is above 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (type B)
• Vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake assist
• Vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is
greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When there is a metal plate in the road in front of the vehicle on a downhill slope
● When there is a metal object such as a sign board in front of the vehicle on an
uphill slope
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle's line of travel.
188
2-4. Using other driving systems
● When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic struc-
ture to appear directly in the vehicle's line of travel.
● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
● When passing through certain toll gates
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
2
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
When driving
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● On slippery roads such as those covered with ice or snow
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the
sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 439, 449)
189
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
190
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
191
2
When driving
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
192
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P. 202)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing.
2
Example on your vehicle
When driving
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 900 lb. (410 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
900 lb. — 366 lb. = 534 lb. (410 kg —166 kg = 244 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
534 lb. — 388 lb. = 146 lb. (244 kg — 176 kg = 68 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. (P. 195)
193
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Package tray
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
194
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 900 lb. (410 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
2
When driving
■ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 399)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
195
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
● Tire inflation pressure falls in winter as the outside temperature
falls. Add 2.9 to 4.3 psi (20 to 30 kPa, 0.2 to 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
to the standard tire inflation pressure.
196
2-5. Driving information
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
2
When driving
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
197
2-5. Driving information
Selecting snow chains
Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire sizes.
Side chain
0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter
1.18 in. [30 mm] in length
0.39 in. [10 mm] in width
Cross chain
0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter
0.98 in. [25 mm] in length
0.55 in. [14 mm] in width
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
● Install the chains on the front tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
198
2-5. Driving information
Shifting the windshield wiper position
You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or
icy condition etc.)
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper
position.
To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield.
*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the upper part of the hook section.
199
When driving
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
2
2-5. Driving information
■ Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear tires.
● Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
200
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
2
When driving
201
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
202
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
203
Interior features
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................... 206
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers.................. 213
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type .................. 214
Using the radio ........................ 217
Using the CD player............. 224
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ............................ 231
Operating an iPod................. 238
Operating a USB
memory.................................. 245
Optimal use of the audio
system..................................... 254
Using the AUX port.............. 256
Using the steering wheel
audio switches...................... 257
204
Interior features
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth®
audio system .... 260
Using the Bluetooth®
audio system ......................... 263
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.... 268
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player..... 271
Bluetooth® audio system
setup........................................ 278
3-4. Using the hands-free
system (for mobile phone)
3
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features.......... 315
• Glove box............................... 316
• Console box .......................... 317
• Overhead console............... 318
• Cup holders........................... 319
• Auxiliary box ......................... 321
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 322
Vanity mirror ........................... 323
Clock......................................... 324
Ashtray ..................................... 325
Cigarette lighter.................... 326
Hands-free system for
mobile phones ...................... 279
Power outlet ............................ 327
Using the hands-free
system
(for mobile phone).............. 283
Seat heaters and
ventilators ............................. 330
Making a phone call ............... 291
Rear sunshade ........................ 333
Setting a mobile phone......... 296
Extended trunk....................... 335
Security and system
setup......................................... 301
Coat hooks .............................. 336
Using the phone book.......... 305
Trunk features......................... 338
Seat heaters ............................ 328
Armrest .................................... 332
Floor mat .................................. 337
Garage door opener ............ 340
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list...................... 312
Compass ................................... 346
Safety Connect ...................... 350
• Interior lights ......................... 314
• Personal lights....................... 314
205
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Airflow display
Automatic mode
Windshield defogger
Off
Outside air or
recirculated air mode
Fan speed display
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Driver's side
temperature control
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Air conditioning
ON/OFF switch
Changes the air outlets used
Passenger’s side
temperature
setting display
Dual operation switch
Fan speed
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic mode.
Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated
air modes.
206
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
STEP 3
Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the
temperature on the
.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature on the
.
3
to separately adjust the
temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press
to
return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting
(simultaneous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time
is pressed.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on
Press
.
to turn the fan off.
207
Interior features
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on the
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air outlets
Press “” or “” on the
.
The air outlets switch each time the
switch is pressed.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle),
AUTO and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each
time the switch is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning
system operates automatically.
208
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
3
Press
onds.
for 2 or more sec-
STEP 2
Press “” (increase) or “”
(decrease) on the
Interior features
STEP 1
.
From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can be
set.
209
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Front outlets (right and left side)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob up to open the
vent and down to close the vent
210
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm
or cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in
accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
uations where the windows need to be defogged.
(outside air) mode in sit-
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
■ When the indicator light on
is pressed.
flashes
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
Press
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light
continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
211
Interior features
■ Window defogger feature
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is stopped.
212
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Without navigation system
ON/OFF
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
3
With navigation system
Interior features
ON/OFF
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot
and burn you.
213
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system (type A)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
Without navigation system (type B)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
214
3-2. Using the audio system
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 217
Using the CD player
P. 224
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
P. 231
Operating an iPod
P. 238
Operating a USB memory
P. 245
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 254
Using the AUX port
P. 256
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 257
3
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
215
Interior features
■ Using mobile phones
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in USA and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
216
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Preset station buttons
Radio text message button
Traffic information button
AMFM
mode buttons
Scan button
Frequency
adjustment
(AM/FM mode)

and channel
(SAT mode) knob
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

SAT button
Channel category button
: If equipped
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1
Search for desired stations by turning
“” on
STEP 2
or pressing “” or
.
Press and hold the button (from
be set to until you hear a beep.
to
) the station is to
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
217
Interior features
Seek button
3
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1
Press
.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
Press “” or “” on
during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
● “ROCK”
● “EASY LIS” (Easy listening)
● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
● “INFORM” (Information)
● “RELIGION”
● “MISC” (Miscellaneous)
● “ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
STEP 2
Press
, or “” or “” on
.
The radio seeks or scans the stations by the relevant program type.
■ Displaying radio station names
Press
.
218
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
A text message is displayed when “MSG” is shown on the screen.
If the text continues past the end of the display, “
hold
until you hear a beep.
” is displayed. Press and
XM® Satellite Radio (If equipped)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1
Press
.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
“SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3”
Turn
to select the desired channel in the all categories or
press “” or “” on
to select the desired channel in
the current category.
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from
to
) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep.
■ Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on
.
■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning the channels in the current category
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
219
Interior features
STEP 2
3
3-2. Using the audio system
● Scanning the preset channels
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
■ Displaying text information
Press
.
STEP 1
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
● “CH NAME”
● “TITLE” (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
● “NAME” (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
● “CH NUMBER”
220
3-2. Using the audio system
■ When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains and transmitters.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
Interior features
● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using
3
, and the receiver's 8-character ID number
will appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
221
3-2. Using the audio system
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
“UNAUTH”
“NO SIGNAL”
“LOADING”
222
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
“OFF AIR”
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
“-----”
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
3-2. Using the audio system
“CH UNAVL”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
223
Interior features
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
3
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Playback/Pause button
Playback button
Eject button
Load button
Text button
Search
playback
button
Random playback
button
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume
Track selector button
CD selector button
Repeat play button
Loading CDs
■ Loading a CD
STEP 1 Press
.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being inserted.
224
3-2. Using the audio system
STEP 3
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert
the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel the operation, press
. If you do not insert a disc within
15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
STEP 1
To select the CD to be ejected,
press “” or “” on
.
The selected disc number is shown
on the display.
Selecting, fast-forwarding, rewinding, and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press “” to move up and “” to move down using
the desired track number is displayed.
until
■ Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
225
Interior features
Press
and remove the CD.
■ Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
STEP 2
3
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Scanning tracks
STEP 1
Press
.
To cancel, press
STEP 2
again.
Press the button again when the desired track is reached.
Selecting a CD
■ To select a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on
.
■ Scanning loaded CDs
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2
again.
Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
226
(
).
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
■ Current CD
Press
(RAND).
Tracks are played in random order.
To cancel, press
■ All CDs
Press and hold
(RAND) again.
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
3
Repeat play
To cancel, press
Interior features
■ To repeat a track
Press
(RPT).
(RPT) again.
■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  CD title  Track title
227
3-2. Using the audio system
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding
enables to display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
until you hear a beep
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been operated for more
than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“ERROR”: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait
for a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the
CD still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
228
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
3
● Low-quality and deformed CDs
recording area
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
229
Interior features
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
230
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Playback/Pause button
Playback button
Eject button
Load button
Folder
selector
buttons
Search
playback
button
Text button
Random
playback
button
File selector
knob
“PWRVOL” knob
3
Power Volume
Disc selector button
Interior features
File selector button
Repeat play button
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 224, 225
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 226
231
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
() or
() to select the desired folder.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
() until you hear a beep.
■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2
When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting a file
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired
file.
■ Scanning the files in a folder
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press
again.
When the desired file is reached, press
232
again.
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
(
).
Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
■ Playing all the files from a disc in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
3
(RAND) again.
Interior features
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Folder no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title
(MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name
233
3-2. Using the audio system
■ CD player protection feature
P. 228
■ Display
P. 228
■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display.
“ERROR”: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for
a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still
cannot be played back.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used
P. 228
■ Lens cleaners
P. 228
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods of time
P. 228
234
3-2. Using the audio system
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
* Compatible with VBR
3
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
*Only compatible with 2-channel playback
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc
is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
235
Interior features
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
3-2. Using the audio system
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
236
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 229
■ CD player precautions
P. 230
237
3
Interior features
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
■ Connecting an iPod
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
STEP 1
Turn on the power of iPod if it is
not turned on.
STEP 2
Press
.
■ Control panel
Shuffle playback button
Repeat play button
Playback/Pause button
Go back button
Text button
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume
iPod menu/
Song selector knob
Playback button
Song selector button
: If equipped
238
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a play mode
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Turning
to select iPod menu mode.
changes the play mode in the following order:
“PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS”
“PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS”
“AUDIOBOOKS”
STEP 3
Press
to select the desired play mode.
3
Interior features
239
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Play mode list
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
-
-
“PLAYLISTS”
Playlists select Songs select
“ARTISTS”
Artists select
“ALBUMS”
Albums select Songs select
-
-
“SONGS”
Songs select
-
-
-
-
Albums select Songs select
-
“PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select
“GENRES”
Genre select
Artists select
“COMPOSERS”
Composers
select
Albums select Songs select
“AUDIOBOOKS” Songs select
-
Albums select Songs select
-
-
-
■ Selecting a list
STEP 1
Turn
to display the first selection list.
STEP 2
Press
STEP 3
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press
(
).
240
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting songs
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired
song.
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press
(
).
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
3
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Interior features
Shuffle playback
■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press
(RAND).
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name
241
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Pressing
to enter iPod menu mode.
changes sound modes. (P. 254)
■ About iPod
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
● iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may
not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to
a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve the problem.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own con-
trols. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead.
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
■ Display
P. 228
242
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade
your iPod software to the latest version.
■ Compatible models
Model
Generation
Software version
5th generation
Ver. 1.2.0 or higher
iPod nano
1st generation
Ver. 1.3.0 or higher
2nd generation
Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
iPod touch
1st generation
Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic
1st generation
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
3
Interior features
iPod
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models
listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
243
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-
nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-
minal.
244
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■ Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
STEP 1
Turn on the power of USB memory if it is not turned on.
3
STEP 2
Press
.
Interior features
: If equipped
245
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Control panel
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Playback/Pause button
Folder selector buttons
Text button
Search playback
button
File selector knob
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume
Playback button
File selector button
246
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
() or
() to select the desired folder.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
() until you hear a beep.
■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2
When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
3
Selecting and scanning files
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired
file.
■ Scanning the files in a folder
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press
again.
When the desired file is reached, press
again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
(
).
247
Interior features
■ Selecting a file
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only) 
Track title  Artist name
248
3-2. Using the audio system
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting
it once again may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
reconnected, format the memory.
■ Display
P. 228
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
3
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
249
Interior features
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
250
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
Interior features
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names
3
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
251
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
• When a USB memory containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files
in the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the
first folder. If the same USB memory is removed and reinserted (and the
contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from
the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
252
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to USB memory
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it
is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory
or its terminal.
3
Interior features
253
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode.
Changes the following setting.
• Sound quality and volume
balance
P. 255
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to produce the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
ON/OFF
P. 255
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■ Changing sound quality modes
Press
.
Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order:
“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“ASL”
254
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning
adjusts the level.
Sound quality mode
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
“BAS”
Bass*
-5 to 5
“MID”
Mid-range*
-5 to 5
Low
High
“TRE”
Treble*
-5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to front
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off
Turning
clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning
counter-
clockwise turns off the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
255
3
Interior features
Mode
displayed
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connect the portable audio
device.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
256
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Turns the power on, selects
an audio source
Increases/decreases volume
Radio mode: Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a track,
file (MP3 and
WMA) and disc
iPod mode (if equipped):
Selects a song
USB memory
equipped):
mode
(if
Selects a file and folder
Turning the power on
Press
when the audio system is turned OFF.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the button down until you hear
a beep.
257
3
Interior features
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and
album
3-2. Using the audio system
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. If no discs are inserted
in the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be
skipped.
FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player
Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod or USB memoryAMFM1
: If equipped
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on
ume.
to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2
Press “”or “” on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on the switch
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1
STEP 2
258
Press
to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod (if equipped) or
USB memory (if equipped) mode.
Press “” or “” on
to select the desired track/file or song.
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting an album
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder (if equipped)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select USB memory mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the CD mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
3
Interior features
■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Press
again.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
259
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via
wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of
playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does
not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Title
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Page
P. 263
®
Operating a Bluetooth enabled portable player
P. 268
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
P. 271
Bluetooth® audio system setup
P. 278
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the portable player is switched off
● If the portable player is not connected
● If the portable player’s battery is low
● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the portable player
260
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 304)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Compatible models
3
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed:
Ver. 1.2)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions
may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of
IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
261
Interior features
● Following Profiles:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
262
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot be
displayed.
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.
263
3
Interior features
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display (press
and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable to the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without the need to check the display or operate
.
■ Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
264
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure
below to register (pair) a portable player:
STEP 1
Press
and select “BT•A MENU” using
STEP 2
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using
.
.
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
STEP 3
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command
.
Register a portable player name by either of the following methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using
, and say the name to be
registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 5
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
STEP 6
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.
265
Interior features
or
STEP 4
3
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® phone is heard.
STEP 7
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
.
(Bluetooth® phone P. 281)
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Normal operation
First menu
Second
menu
“BT•A
Setup”
“Setup”
“System
Setup”
266
Third menu
Operation detail
“Pair Audio”
Registering a portable player
“Connect”
Selecting a portable player to
be used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered name
of a portable player
“List Audios”
Listing the registered portable
players
“Set Passkey”
Changing the passkey
“Delete Audio”
Deleting a registered portable
player
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize”
Initializing the system
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
3
● Operating the system with
Interior features
● Registering a portable player to the system
■ Changing the passkey
P. 276
267
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Playback/Pause button
Album selector buttons
Text button
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume
BT·A menu knob
Search playback button
Playback button
Track selector button
Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press
() or
().
Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on
to select the desired track.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
268
(
).
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Random playback
Press
(RAND).
To cancel, press
(RAND) again.
Repeat play
Press
3
(RPT).
(RPT) again.
Interior features
To cancel, press
Scanning tracks
Press
.
To cancel, press
again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 257
269
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
■ Display
P. 228
■ Error message
“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.
270
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the
system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:
■ Functions and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
:
● Registering a portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
3
Interior features
● Selecting a portable player to be used
1. “Setup”  2.“Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
271
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Pattern B
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using
STEP 3
Select one of the following functions using a voice command
or
to select “BT•A MENU”.
.
● Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
● Selecting a portable player to be used
“Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name
“Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
272
.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or
,
and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 265)
Selecting a portable player to be used
STEP 1
Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or
.
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used using
.
273
3
Interior features
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Pattern A
STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
.
Pattern B
STEP 3
Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using
.
If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in either
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Changing the registered name of a portable player
STEP 1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
274
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
.
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
, and
say the new name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Listing the registered portable players
3
Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read
aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
275
Interior features
. The list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Changing the passkey
STEP 1
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Pattern B
STEP 2
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not
necessary.
276
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting a registered portable player
STEP 1
Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
STEP 2
Select the desired portable player to be deleted using
.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the
registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice
guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
STEP 3
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
.
(Bluetooth® phone P. 281)
■ The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
277
3
Interior features
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system setup
■ System setup items and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
:
(P. 301)
Pattern B
STEP 1
Press
to select “BT•A MENU”.
STEP 2
Select “System Setup” using
STEP 3
Select one of the following items using
.
:
● Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol” (P. 303)
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
“Device Name” (P. 303)
● Initializing the system
“Initialize” (P. 304)
278
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Hands-free system for mobile phones
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the
hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Title
Page
P. 283
Making a phone call
P. 291
Setting a mobile phone
P. 296
Security and system setup
P. 301
Using the phone book
P. 305
Interior features
Using the hands-free system
3
279
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the mobile phone is switched off
● If you are outside service range
● If the mobile phone is not connected
● If the mobile phone's battery is low
● If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the phone
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
•
•
•
•
•
When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
When a window is open
When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
When the air conditioning is set to high
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent the personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 304)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
280
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5)
and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth®
phone.
■ Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of
IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
281
Interior features
CAUTION
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to mobile phone
Do not leave mobile phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become high
resulting in damage to the phone.
282
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot be
displayed.
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free system cannot be
used.
283
3
Interior features
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display (press
and hold)
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Reception level
Bluetooth® connection condition
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Steering wheel switches
Type A
Volume
During an incoming call:
Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call:
Adjusts the receiver volume
Type B
■ Microphone
284
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
off/ends a call/refuses a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable to the operation of the hands-free system without the
need to check the display or operate
.
■ Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
285
Interior features
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Using the hands-free system for the first time
Before using the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a mobile
phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are
heard.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
STEP 3
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” by using
.
, and say a name to be
registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard.
STEP 5
Input the passkey into the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can
be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
286
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
STEP 6
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
.
(Bluetooth® audio player P. 261)
Menu list of the hands-free system
■ Normal operation
Second
menu
Third menu
Operation detail
“Callback”
-
-
Dialing a number stored in the
incoming history memory
-
-
Dialing a number stored in the
outgoing history memory
“Add Entry”
-
Adding a new number
“Change
Name”
-
Changing the registered name
in the phone book
“Delete
Entry”
-
Deleting the registered data
“Phonebook” “Del Spd
Dial”
-
Deleting speed dial
“List
Names”
-
List the registered data
“Speed
Dial”
-
Setting speed dials
“Redial”
287
3
Interior features
First menu
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
First menu
Second
menu
“Security”
“Setup”
“Phone
Setup”
“System
Setup”
288
Third menu
Operation detail
“Set PIN”
Setting a PIN code
“Phbk Lock”
Locking the phone book
“Phbk Unlock”
Unlocking the phone book
“Pair Phone”
Setting a mobile phone to be
used
“Connect”
Selecting a mobile phone to be
used
“Change Name”
Changing a registered name of
a mobile phone
“List Names”
Listing the registered mobile
phones
“Set Passkey”
Changing the passkey
“Delete Phone”
Deleting a registered mobile
phone
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize”
Initialization the system
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Using a short cut key
First menu
Second menu
Operation detail
“Dial XXX (name)”
-
Dialing a name registered in the
phone book
“Phone book add
Entry”
-
Adding a new phone number
“Phone book Change
name”
-
Changing a registered name in
the phone book
“Phone book Delete
Entry”
-
Deleting the registered data
“Phone book List
names”
-
Listing the registered data
“Phone book Set
Speed Dial”
-
Setting speed dials
“Phone book Delete
Speed Dial”
-
Deleting speed dials
“Dial XXX (number)”
-
Dialing by inputting a number
“Phonebook Unlock”
Unlocking the phone book
“Phonebook Lock”
Locking the phone book
Interior features
“Phonebook”
3
289
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
 (star), and + (plus).
Say a command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough road
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
● Registering a mobile phone to the system
■ Changing the passkey
P. 299
290
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Making a phone call
■ Making a phone call
● Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
● Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
3
Interior features
■ Receiving a phone call
● Answering a phone call
● Refusing a phone call
■ Transferring a phone call
■ Call waiting
■ Using the call history memory
● Dialing
● Storing data in the phone book
● Deleting
Dialing by inputting a number
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
291
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
STEP 3
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using
.
Dialing by inputting a name
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch
when the desired name is read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using
.
Speed dialing
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
292
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
Press the off-hook switch.
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
When receiving a phone call
■ Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the mobile phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.
*1:
This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the mobile phone to the system during a call.
*2:
While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the mobile phone.
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available:
● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the offhook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between
calls.)
● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.
293
Interior features
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Using a call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use number stored in the call history
memory:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing history memory) or “Call back” (when
using a number stored in the incoming history memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number by using
.
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” by using a voice
STEP 3
command or
.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice
command or
.
Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or
294
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
■ Call waiting
● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service
provider.
■ Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history memories.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk at the same time as with the other party.
● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
3
Interior features
295
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Setting a mobile phone
Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following function can be used for registered mobile
phones:
■ Functions and operation procedures
To enter menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a
voice command or
:
● Registering a mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Pair Phone”
● Selecting a mobile phone to be used
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Connect Phone (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered mobile phones
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “List Names”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Delete Phone”
Registering a mobile phone
Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or
cedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 286)
296
, and do the pro-
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
STEP 1
Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select a mobile phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
STEP 2
Select a mobile phone to be used by using
.
297
3
Interior features
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Changing a registered name
STEP 1
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using
.
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
say the new name.
STEP 4
298
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
, and
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Listing the registered mobile phones
Selecting “List Names” by using a voice command or
begins read-
ing aloud the list of the registered mobile phones.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read
aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a mobile phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
3
● Deleting a mobile phone: “Delete Phone”
STEP 1
Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Pattern B
STEP 2
Select a 4 to 8-digit number by using
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press
once again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not
necessary.
299
Interior features
Changing the passkey
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Deleting a registered mobile phone
STEP 1
Select “Delete” by using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select a mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. While the name of
the desired mobile phone is being read aloud, press the talk
switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2
Select a desired mobile phone to be deleted using
.
If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player,
the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A
voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
STEP 3
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
(Bluetooth® audio player P. 261)
■ The number of mobile phone that can be registered
Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.
300
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Security and system setup
■ Security setting items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
:
● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN”
● Locking the phone book
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)”
● Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk
Unlock)”
3
Interior features
■ System setup items and operation procedure
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using
:
● Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Guidance Vol”
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Device Name”
● Initializing the system
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Initialize”
301
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Setting or changing the PIN
■ Setting a PIN
STEP 1
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or
STEP 2
Enter a PIN by using a voice command or
When using
.
.
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
■ Changing the PIN
STEP 1
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or
STEP 2
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or
STEP 3
Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or
When using
.
.
.
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
STEP 1
Select “Phonebook lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook unlock
(Phbk Unlock)” by using a voice command or
STEP 2
Input the PIN and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
302
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Setting voice guidance volume
STEP 1
Select “Guidance Vol” using
.
STEP 2
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
To increase the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
clockwise.
Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
Select “Device Name” using
STEP 2
Turn
STEP 3
Select “Go Back” using
.
to display the Bluetooth® device address and name.
to return to “System Setup”.
303
Interior features
STEP 1
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Initializing the system
STEP 1
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using
STEP 2
Select “Confirm” by using
.
again.
■ Initialization
● The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered mobile phone data
• Security code
• Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data
• Passkey for the mobile phones
• Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players
• Guidance volume
• Receiver volume
• Ring tone volume
● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its
original state.
■ When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
● Dialing by inputting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book
304
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Using the phone book
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Add Entry”
● Changing the registered name in the phone book
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook”  2. “List Names”
● Setting speed dials
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
3
Interior features
● Deleting the registered data
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Entry”
● Deleting speed dials
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
● Inputting a phone number by using a voice command
● Transferring data from the mobile phone
● Inputting a phone number using
● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history
■ Adding procedure
STEP 1
Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or
.
305
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command
STEP 2
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the mobile phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice
command or
.
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for
the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
.
Inputting a phone number using
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using
.
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using
again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
306
, and press
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history:
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
STEP 3
.
Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using
, and say the desired
name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
again.
In STEP 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial.
307
Interior features
b. Select the desired data using
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Changing a registered name in the phone book
STEP 1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch, say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2
Select the desired name to be changed using
.
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
say the new name.
STEP 4
308
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
, and
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Listing the registered data
Select “List Names” using a voice command or
. The list of the reg-
istered data will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while a data is being read aloud selects the data,
and the following function will be available.
● Dialing: “Dial”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
3
● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
Setting speed dial
STEP 1
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the
following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command
or
:
a. Press the talk switch, say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
309
Interior features
● Setting speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Pattern B
STEP 2
Select the desired data using
STEP 3
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed
dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a
voice command or
.
.
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Deleting registered data
STEP 1
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2 Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired phone
number to be deleted.
b. Press the talk switch, say “List Names”. While the name of the
desired phone number is being read aloud, press the talk
switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2
310
Select the desired data to be deleted using
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Deleting speed dial
STEP 1
Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or
STEP 2
.
Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
3
Interior features
311
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
Front personal lights (P. 314)
Front interior lights (P. 314)
Shift lever lighting
This light turns on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Rear personal lights ( P. 314)
Rear interior light ( P. 314)
Door courtesy lights
Front foot well lighting
Outer foot lights
312
3-5. Using the interior lights
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the following lights remain ON when the door is not fully closed and the door
position is ON, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
● Interior lights
● Front personal lights
● Front foot well lighting
● Rear door courtesy lights
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 511)
3
Interior features
313
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights
Interior lights
Front and rear interior lights
ON/OFF
Door position ON/OFF
The illuminated entry system is
activated when the switch is in
the locked position (the door
position is on).
Personal lights
Front
ON/OFF
Rear
ON/OFF
314
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
3
Interior features
Glove box
Overhead console
Cup holders
Console box
Auxiliary box
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
315
3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box
Glove box
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( P. 46)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
316
3-6. Using the storage features
Console box
Console box
Slide the armrest while pulling up
the lever, and lift the armrest.
■ Tray in the console box
3
■ Console box light
The console box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
317
Interior features
The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.
3-6. Using the storage features
Overhead console
Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
318
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Cup holders
Front
To open, press down and release
the front of the cup holder lid.
Rear
3
Interior features
319
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
■ Using the cup holder (front) to store small items
Remove the holder.
■ The cup holder (front) can be adjusted to the size of the cups or drink-cans
Change the holder position.
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
320
3-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary box
Auxiliary box
To open, press down the knob.
CAUTION
3
■ Caution while driving
321
Interior features
Keep the auxiliary box closed.
In the event of sudden braking, personal injury may result from contact due to
movement of the open auxiliary box or items that may come out of the auxiliary box.
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position, then
slide backwards.
322
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
3
Interior features
323
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
Without navigation system
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
With navigation system
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
■ The clock is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
324
3-7. Other interior features
Ashtray
Push the back part of the lid to
open.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards.
CAUTION
3
■ When not in use
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
325
Interior features
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
3-7. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
Push the back part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
326
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10
A.
3
■ The power outlet can be used when
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
327
Interior features
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters
Heats the seats
Left front seat
Right front seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use
Set the dial to 0. The indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
: If equipped
328
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Set the dial to 0 when the engine is not running.
3
Interior features
329
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters and ventilators
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.
Heats the seats
Left front seat
Right front seat
The indicator light (orange)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use
Set the dial to 0. The indicator light turns off.
: If equipped
330
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Set the dial to 0 when the engine is not running.
331
Interior features
NOTICE
3
3-7. Other interior features
Armrest
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
332
3-7. Other interior features
Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switch
shown below.
Type A
Raise/lower
3
Type B
Interior features
Raise/lower
: If equipped
333
3-7. Other interior features
■ The rear sunshade can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Reverse operation feature
The rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted into R. The
rear sunshade rises when the shift lever is shifted out of R and vehicle speed
reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
■ When the reverse operation feature does not operate
The rear sunshade may not lower or rise automatically. In this case, press the switch
to lower or raise the rear sunshade.
CAUTION
■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.
334
3-7. Other interior features
Extended trunk
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and
rear seat area.
STEP 1
Pull down the armrest.
STEP 2
Open the armrest door.
3
Unlock
Lock
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Ensure that the armrest door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into
the cabin, resulting in injury.
335
Interior features
The armrest door can be locked
and unlocked using the
mechanical key.
3-7. Other interior features
Coat hooks
To use the coat hook, push it in.
CAUTION
■ Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.
336
3-7. Other interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using the
retaining hooks (clips) provided.
The shape of the retaining hooks
(clips) and the fixing procedure
of the floor mat for your vehicle
may differ from those shown in
the illustration. For details, refer
to the floor mat retention clip
installation instructions supplied
with the clips.
3
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift lever
in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
337
Interior features
CAUTION
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk features
■ Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■ Grocery bag hooks
■ Luggage mat
STEP 1
338
Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 2
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
CAUTION
3
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
NOTICE
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
339
Interior features
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
3-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Buttons
Indicator
■ Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
Point the remote control transmitSTEP 1
ter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
340
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds
and remains lit, the HomeLink
button is already programmed.
Use the other buttons or follow
the
“Reprogramming
a
HomeLink button” instructions. (P. 343)
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
341
Interior features
STEP 3
3
3-7. Other interior features
■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.
STEP 2
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
STEP 3
Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
342
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.
3-7. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
343
Interior features
Operating the HomeLink
3
3-7. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLink button.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: CB2070AHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
344
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
3
Interior features
345
3-7. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
push and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
■ Displays and directions
Display
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
: If equipped
346
3-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
3
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold “AUTO” for 6 secSTEP 2
onds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
347
Interior features
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 3
Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
■ Circling calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold “AUTO” for 9 secSTEP 2
onds.
C appears on the compass display.
STEP 3
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less in a circle until a direction is
displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
348
3-7. Other interior features
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
3
● A door is open.
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
349
Interior features
CAUTION
3-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
■ System components
“SOS” button
Microphone
LED light indicators
: If equipped
350
3-7. Other interior features
■ Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 353)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 354)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 354)
3
Interior features
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 354)
■ Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
351
3-7. Other interior features
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-
ing Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con-
tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in
Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States
(except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica-
tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
352
3-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.
Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service
is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the
occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats
the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
353
Interior features
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
3
3-7. Other interior features
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.
354
3-7. Other interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
3
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
355
Interior features
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
3-7. Other interior features
■ License
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following
United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501
5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239
5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569
5,710,784 5,778,338
■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
356
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 358
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............... 361
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 370
Hood........................................... 374
Positioning a floor jack ......... 375
4-2. Maintenance
Engine compartment ............ 377
Maintenance
requirements ........................ 364
Tires............................................ 390
General maintenance .......... 366
Wheels...................................... 403
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................. 369
Air conditioning filter ........... 405
Tire inflation pressure........... 399
Electronic key battery.......... 407
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 409
Headlight aim .......................... 418
Light bulbs................................ 420
357
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
■ Touch-up paint (if equipped)
Touch-up paint may be used to cover small chips or scratches.
Apply the paint soon after the damage occurs or corrosion may set in. To apply the
touch-up paint so it is hardly noticeable the trick is to apply it only to the bare spots.
Apply only the smallest amount possible and do not paint the surface around the
scratch or chip.
358
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving
for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■ When cleaning the windshield
Off
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the
raindrop sensor
■ Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
359
4
Maintenance and care
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate unexpectedly in the following
situations, and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries and cause
damage to the wiper blades.
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-
minum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint
surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may
be damaged.
360
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
4
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Maintenance and care
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
361
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 88)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or severe injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
362
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.
• Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior
part's painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
4
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm
water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
363
Maintenance and care
■ Water on the floor
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
364
4-2. Maintenance
■ Reset the maintenance data (USA only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF with the trip meter A read-
ing shown. (P. 138)
STEP 2 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode. Continue to press and hold
the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
4
CAUTION
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 387)
365
Maintenance and care
■ Warning in handling of battery
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owners
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
366
Check points
Battery
Maintenance-free.
(P. 387)
Brake fluid
At the correct level? (P. 384)
Engine coolant
At the correct level? (P. 382)
Engine oil
At the correct level? (P. 379)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Power steering fluid
At the correct level? (P. 385)
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 384)
Washer fluid
At the correct level? (P. 389)
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 418)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Maintenance and care
Head restraints
4
367
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Door/trunk
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
368
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
4
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
369
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
370
Parts and tools
(P. 387)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
(P. 384)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
(P. 382)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the USA:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 379)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 409)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Tire inflation pressure
(P. 399)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Headlight aim
(P. 418)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Power steering fluid
level
(P. 385)
Washer fluid
(P. 389)
4

Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser (P. 384)
• Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power
steering fluid)
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury.
■ When working on the engine compartment:
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 384)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in
the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
4
Maintenance and care
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
■ Rear
4
Maintenance and care
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle:
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P.
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
4
Fuse box
(P. 409)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 384)
Radiator
(P. 384)
Washer fluid tank
(P. 389)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 382)
Maintenance and care
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 385)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 380)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 379)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 384)
Battery
(P. 387)
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
Front
Right-hand side
When installing the cover, make sure that the engine coolant reservoir
hose positioned as shown in the illustration.
Left-hand side
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Installing the clips
Press the tip of the clip against a
hard surface, such as a desk, to
allow the center part of the clip
to be pushed up.
Insert
Press
NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compartment cover
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
Engine oil
4
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
379
Maintenance and care
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5
STEP 6
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil
selection
Oil quantity
(Low  Full)
Items
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
380
P. 489
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre-
quent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km)
● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km),
contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
4
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
381
Maintenance and care
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Full
Low
If the level is on or below the L line,
add coolant up to the F line.
■ When adding the engine coolant
When installing the reservoir cap, make sure
that the engine coolant reservoir hose positioned as shown in the illustration.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
USA: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
4
■ When the engine is hot
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
383
Maintenance and care
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■ Adding fluid
Fluid type
Items
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
Power steering fluid
4
Maintenance and care
■ Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140F - 175F [60C - 80C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50F - 85F [10C - 30C])
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
Items
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III
Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding fluid)
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise and
wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall the reservoir cap.
Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level.
CAUTION
■ Checking the fluid level
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■ When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■ After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
4
■ Before recharging
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors.
STEP 3 Restart the engine.
387
Maintenance and care
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
4
■ When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
389
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
■ Tire rotation
If equipped with full-size spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Front
390
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If equipped with compact spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 441)
Vehicles with compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not
equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.
4
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 393)
391
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 493)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
392
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering and selecting ID codes
■ Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can
switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure
warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new
set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
“MAIN”
“2nd”
393
4
Maintenance and care
■ Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to the
wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate
properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning
light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 499).
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to
the specified level.
■ If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning
light does not blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
395
4
Maintenance and care
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 196)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
For vehicles sold in the USA
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix
tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
● Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
4
Maintenance and care
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 391)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 493)
4
Maintenance and care
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
4
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
401
Maintenance and care
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 391)
403
4
Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■ Replacement method
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the glove box. Remove
STEP 2
the glove box cover.
STEP 3
Remove the filter cover.
4
Remove the filter.
Be sure that the correct side of
the filter faces up when installing
it.
405
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the
filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at 72
psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If it is not available, have the filter
cleaned by your Lexus dealer.
■ Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or
early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system
● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
4
Remove the cover.
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
Insert a new battery with the +
terminal facing up.
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can
cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 378)
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
STEP 1
Driver's side instrument panel
4
Remove the lid.
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 412) for details about which fuse to check.
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
STEP 6
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment
Fuse
412
Ampere
Circuit
1
PSB
30 A
Pre-collision seat belt
2
H-LP CLN
30 A
3
P-P / SEAT
30 A
Power seat
4
RR DEF
50 A
Rear window defogger
5
ABS NO.2
30 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
6
FAN MAIN
50 A
Electric cooling fans
7
ABS NO.1
50 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
8
HTR
50 A
Air conditioning system
9
RR FOG
10 A
10
ALT-CDS
10 A
Alternator condenser
11
ST
30 A
Starting system
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
12
ALT
140 A
PSB, H-LP CLN, P-P/SEAT, RR DEF,
ABS NO.2, FAN MAIN, ABS NO.1,
HTR, RR FOG, RR DOOR RH, RR
DOOR LH, FUEL OPN, FR FOG,
OBD, STOP, TI & TE, A/C, PWR,
DOOR NO.2, S/ROOF, GAUGE
NO.2, POWER, P/SEAT
13
STR LOCK
20 A
Steering lock system
14
IG2
20 A
GAUGE NO.2, IGN, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system
15
HAZ
15 A
Turn signal lights
16
ETCS
10 A
Electronic throttle control system
17
E-ACM
10 A
Electric active control mount
18
A/C CTRL PNL
15 A
Air conditioning system
19
MAYDAY
10 A
MAYDAY
20
ALT-S
7.5 A
Charging system
21
AM2
7.5 A
Starting system
22
EFI MAIN
30 A
EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, fuel system, ECT
system
23
AMP
30 A
Audio system
24
AMP2
30 A
Audio system
25
DOOR NO.1
25 A
Power door lock system
26
RADIO NO.1
15 A
Audio system
27
ECU-B NO.1
10 A
ECU powers
28
DOME
10 A
Interior lights, meters, vanity lights
29
H-LP (LH)
15 A
Left-hand headlight (high beam)
4
Maintenance and care
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
30
H-LP (RH)
15 A
Right-hand headlight (high beam)
31
H-LP (LL)
15 A
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
32
H-LP (RL)
15 A
Right-hand headlight (low beam)
33
HORN
10 A
Horns
34
EFI NO.1
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, ECT system
35
MPX-B
10 A
Meters
36
A/F
20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
37
S-HORN
7.5 A
S-HORN
38
EFI NO.2
15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
39
EFI NO.3
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
RR DOOR RH
25 A
Power window
2
RR DOOR LH
25 A
Power window
3
FUEL OPN
7.5 A
Fuel filler door opener
4
FR FOG
15 A
Front fog lights
5
OBD
7.5 A
On-board diagnosis system
6
ECU-B NO.2
7.5 A
ECU powers
7
STOP
10 A
Stop lights
8
TI & TE
30 A
Tilt and telescopic steering
9
A/C
7.5 A
Air conditioning system
10
PWR
25 A
Power windows
11
DOOR NO.2
25 A
Main body ECU
12
S/ROOF
30 A
Moon roof
13
TAIL
10 A
Front and rear side marker lights, tail
lights, license plate lights
14
PANEL
7.5 A
Switch illumination
4
Maintenance and care
1
415
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
15
416
ECU-IG NO. 1
Ampere
Circuit
10 A
Moon roof, seat heaters, power windows, clock, automatic windshield
wiper, electric cooling fans, driving
position memory system, seat position
memory system
16
ECU-IG NO. 2
7.5 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system, brake assist system, cruise
control system, stop lights, shift lock
control system
17
A/C NO. 2
10 A
Air conditioning system, rear window
defogger
18
WASH
10 A
Windshield washer
19
S-HTR
20 A
Seat heaters, air conditioning system
20
GAUGE NO. 1
10 A
Emergency flashers, back-up lights,
rear sunshade, charging system
21
WIP
25 A
Windshield wipers
22
H-LP LVL
7.5 A
Headlight leveling system
23
IGN
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS airbag system, steering lock
system
24
GAUGE NO. 2
7.5 A
Meters
25
ECU-ACC
7.5 A
Clock, main body ECU
26
CIG
20 A
Cigarette lighter
27
PWR OUTLET
20 A
Power outlet
28
RADIO NO. 2
7.5 A
Audio system
29
MIR HTR
15 A
Outside rear view mirror defoggers
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
30
POWER
30 A
Power window
31
P/SEAT
30 A
Power seat
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 420)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
4
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
417
Maintenance and care
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights)
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
STEP 1 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 378)
Turn bolt A in either direction
STEP 2
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
418
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the error is over the value
specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
4
Maintenance and care
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 495)
■ Front bulb locations
Headlight high beam
and daytime running
light
Headlight
low beam
(halogen
bulb)
Front side
marker light
Front turn signal light
■ Rear bulb locations
Rear side marker light
Stop/tail light
Back-up light
Tail light
Rear turn signal light
420
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight low beams (for vehicles with halogen bulbs), headlight
high beams and daytime running lights
STEP 1 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 378)
Turn the bulb base counterclockSTEP 2
wise.
STEP 3
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
4
Maintenance and care
421
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Front side marker lights and front turn signal lights
Remove the access hole cover.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Front side marker light
Front turn signal light
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Front side marker light
STEP 3
422
Remove the light bulb.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Front turn signal light
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
4
Maintenance and care
423
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Back-up lights and tail lights
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
trunk panel cover clips.
STEP 2
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn the bulb bases
counterclockwise.
Tail light
Back-up light
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
Tail light
Back-up light
424
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Stop/tail, rear turn signal and rear side marker lights
Open the trunk lid and remove the
STEP 1
access hole cover.
STEP 2
Stop/tail light
Rear turn signal light
Rear side marker light
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4
STEP 3
Maintenance and care
Stop/tail light
Remove the light bulb.
425
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear turn signal light
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
Rear side marker light
STEP 3
426
Remove the light bulb.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs)
● Parking lights
● Front fog lights
● Side turn signal lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
4
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
■ Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■ LED light bulbs
The parking lights, side turn signal lights, high mounted stoplight and license plate
lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to
your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
427
Maintenance and care
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors,
power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■ Discharge headlights
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
428
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.............. 430
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ....................................... 431
If you think something is
wrong ...................................... 437
Fuel pump shut off
system .................................... 438
5
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ................................. 439
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 449
If you have a flat tire................. 461
If the engine will not start .... 470
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ....................... 472
If you lose your keys .............. 473
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 474
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................. 477
If your vehicle overheats ..... 480
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 483
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency............................ 484
429
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Without navigation system
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
With navigation system
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
430
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If towing from the front, the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles must be in good
condition. (P. 435)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet
431
5
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
5-1. Essential information
■ Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off)
or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with front wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
Installing towing eyelet
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
432
5-1. Essential information
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 461
5
■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead
to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
433
When trouble arises
CAUTION
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
434
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could
be damaged while being towed.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheel.
5
When trouble arises
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
435
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
Front
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not use the rear transport eyelets.
They are used for shipping purposes only.
436
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
437
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode
or OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
(USA)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
Indicates the following;
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
5
P. 452
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
(USA)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates the following:
• Empty fuel tank
• Loose fuel tank cap
• Malfunction in the electronic engine control system;
• Malfunction in the electronic throttle control system; or
• Malfunction in the electronic automatic transmission control system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• Front passenger occupant classification system
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(USA)
Warning light/Details
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
(Canada)
(If equipped)
Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
Follow the correction procedure.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer*1)
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
5
When trouble arises
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel level
is low.
Refuel the vehicle.
(Approximately 2.8 gal.
[10.5 L, 2.3 Imp. gal.] or less)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer*2)
Fasten the seat belt.
Warns the driver to fasten his
or her seat belt.
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(without navigation system)
(with navigation system)
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Fasten the seat belt.
(warning buzzer*2)
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his or her seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (P. 444)
• Flat tire (P. 461)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure (including the full-size
spare tire) to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the light
does not turn off even if the
tire inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system.
(P. 446)
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
442
P. 449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 452
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the
driver and front passenger that his or her sear belt is not fastened. The buzzer
sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of
at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer
will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
■ First check when the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
Check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the following:
The airbag sensor assembly
The front airbag sensors
The side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
The curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
The driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
The seat belt pretensioner assemblies
The inflators
The interconnecting wiring and power sources
When trouble arises
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light may flash and buzzer may sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
Full-size spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
Compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even
though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed (vehicles with full-
size spare tire).
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used.
● If the full-size spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal recep-
5
tion.
trunk (vehicles with full-size spare tire).
445
When trouble arises
● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 511)
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
447
5
When trouble arises
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning message turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message
5
Details
When trouble arises
(U.S.A)
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
A buzzer also sounds.
(Canada)
(Flashing)
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.
(Flashing)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
450
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
A buzzer also sounds.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction.
A buzzer also sounds.
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on
the display.
(If equipped)
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
or
(Flashing)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control
system.
A buzzer also sounds.
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
5
(If equipped)
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedure.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message turns off.
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
flashes and a
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of
the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood.
cate that hood is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk.
cate that trunk is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
(Flashing)
Close the moon roof.
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
Release the parking
(with the vehicle having
reached a speed of more brake.
than 3 mph [5 km/h]).
A buzzer also sounds.
5
When trouble arises
(Flashing)
Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and the driver’s
door opened).
A buzzer also sounds.
Indicates that the washer
fluid level is low.
Add washer fluid.
A buzzer also sounds.
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that engine oil
level is low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check the level of engine
oil, and add if necessary.
Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
soon.
(USA only)
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
after the maintenance
data has been reset.
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*.
(USA only)
454
If necessary, perform
maintenance.
Perform the necessary
Comes on approximately maintenance. Please reset
5000 miles (8000 km) the maintenance data
after the maintenance is
after the maintenance
performed (P. 365)
data has been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the precollision system is not
currently functional.
• Clean the grille and the
sensor.
• Wait until the pre-collision system cools down.
Indicates that the sensor
of intuitive parking assist
is dirty or covered with
ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the radar
cruise control sensor is
dirty or covered with ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
5
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance
because the windshield
wipers are set at high
speed operation mode.
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn them off or set them
to either the intermittent
or the slow mode.
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in radar cruise
mode).
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
Indicates one or more
stop lights are burned
out.
Have the defective bulbs
replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance closes.
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedure for problem in smart access system with push-button start.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message turns off.
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once

Warning message
(Comes on for 8 seconds.)
(Flashing)
Once 3 times
(Flashing)
458
Details
Correction
procedure
Indicates that an
attempt was made
to start the engine
without the electronic key being
present, or the
electronic key was
not functioning
normally.
Start the engine
with the electronic key
present.*
Indicates that a
door other than
the driver’s door
has been opened
and closed with
the “ENGINE
Confirm the locaSTART STOP”
tion of the elecswitch in any
tronic key.
mode other than
OFF and the electronic key outside
of the detection
area.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Warning message
Once 3 times
(Flashing)
Con- Continuous tinuous
(Flashing)
Once
Correction
procedure
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened or
closed with the
shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in
any mode other
than OFF and the
electronic key
outside of the
detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
OFF or confirm
the location of the
electronic key.
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened or
closed with the
shift lever out of P, • Shift the shift
lever to P.
the “ENGINE
• Confirm the
START STOP”
location of the
switch in any
electronic key.
mode other than
OFF and the electronic key outside
of the detection
area.
Indicates that the
key battery is low.

Replace the battery. (P. 407)
(Flashing)
459
5
When trouble arises
(Displayed alternately)
Details
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once

Warning message


(Comes on for 15 seconds.)
Details
Correction
procedure
Indicates that a
door has been
opened or closed
and the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch has been
switched twice to
ACCESSORY
mode from OFF.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while applying the
brakes.
Indicates that the
steering lock has
not released.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
again while turning the steering
wheel with the
brake pedal
depressed.
Indicates that the
electronic key
does not operate
properly.
P. 475
(Flashing)
Once



*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,
the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties
receiving the signal from the key. (P. 32)
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Towing eyelet
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
5
Jack
Compact spare tire
When trouble arises
Spare tire
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
STEP 3
Remove the hook.
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
STEP 3
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
5
When trouble arises
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Left-hand
side
Front
Righthand side
Left-hand
side
Rear
Righthand side
Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire
STEP 2
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
STEP 3
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
465
When trouble arises
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Washer
STEP 2
Wheel nut
Disc wheel
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Turn the lug nuts until the washers
come into contact with the wheel.
STEP 3
Lower the vehicle.
STEP 4
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 493)
466
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you
replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with com-
pact spare tire)
Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the following steps
and fit tire chains to the front tires.
STEP 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
STEP 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-
cle.
STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 392)
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
467
When trouble arises
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Replacing a flat tire
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire
to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to
bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
468
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When the compact spare tire attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
● ABS & Brake assist
● VSC
● TRAC
● Navigation system (if equipped)
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
469
When trouble arises
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 391)
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 128), consider each of the following points.
■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Add fuel to the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 128)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 81)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 477)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The starter motor does not turn over
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However,
an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 471)
470
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 477)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 3 Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
STEP 4 Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
When trouble arises
471
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
472
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
473
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 32) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or the
engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the
doors. (P. 26)
STEP 1
Remove the cover on the driver’s
door handle.
STEP 2
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/standard
moon roof (turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows/standard
moon roof (turn and hold)
474
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
After the operation is completed,
reinstall the cover.
Hook the upper claw of the cover
onto the upper catch on the vehicle side, and then push on the
lower side of the cover.
Make sure that the lower claw of
the cover is securely fastened to
the lower catch on the vehicle side.
If the cover is not securely
attached, it may fall off while driving.
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
STEP 1
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
475
5
When trouble arises
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
electronic key that is touched to
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch if any of the doors is opened
and closed while the key is touched
to the switch.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 128)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 3
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 407)
476
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
STEP 2
5
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
477
When trouble arises
Connecting the jumper cables.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode,
then start the vehicle’s engine.
STEP 6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible.
STEP 3
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
478
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
479
5
When trouble arises
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air
conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and inspect
the radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
If the engine compartment
cover needs to be removed:
P. 378
480
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant
is unavailable. (P. 490)
STEP 6
Install the reservoir cap.
Make sure that the engine coolant reservoir hose is positioned
as shown in the illustration.
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
5
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
481
When trouble arises
■ Overheating
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is
running.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
482
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
● Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.
● Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
● Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.
● Restart the engine.
● Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
483
5
When trouble arises
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 4 Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
To stop the engine, press and
STEP 4
hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 3 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP 5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine.
484
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 486
Fuel information..................... 496
Tire information...................... 499
6-2. Customization
Customizable features .......... 511
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ..................... 519
485
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
191.7 in. (4870 mm)
Overall width
71.7 in. (1820 mm)
Overall height *
57.1 in. (1450 mm)
Wheelbase
109.3 in. (2775 mm)
Tread
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*: Unladen vehicle
486
Front
62.0 in. (1575 mm)
Rear
61.6 in. (1565 mm)
900 lb. (410 kg)
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top
left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
■ Engine number
487
6
Vehicle specifications
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Model
2GR-FE
Type
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70  3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)
Displacement
210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
488
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference*)
without filter
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
with filter
6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.3 Imp. qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when exchanging. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and
check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
489
6
Vehicle specifications
Outside temperature
If SAE 5W-30 is not available,
SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
6-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity
9.5 qt.
(9.0 L, 7.9 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
490
6-1. Specifications
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
DENSO
Gap
FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only above spark plugs. Do not adjust gaps for your engine performance or
smooth driveability.
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after
the engine and all the lights are turned
off)
Charging rates
5 A max.
6
Vehicle specifications
491
6-1. Specifications
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid capacity*
6.87 qt. (6.5 L, 5.72 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may
cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transaxle accompanied by
vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transaxle of your vehicle.
Brakes
Pedal clearance *1
2.4 in. (61 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.24 in. (1.0  6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *2
7  10 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51
kgf) while the engine is running.
2
* : Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
492
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid
Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON® II or III
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size
P215/55R17 93V
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
Tire inflation pressure
2
(Recommended cold tire inflation 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm or bar)
When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
pressure)
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds
are permitted by law, add 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17  7J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
Vehicle specifications
493
6-1. Specifications
Type B
Tire size
P215/55R17 93V,
T155/70D17 110M (spare)
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation *:When driving at high speeds above 100
pressure)
mph (160 km/h), in countries where such
speeds are permitted by law, add 4.3 psi
(30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17  7J, 17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
494
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Exterior
Interior
W
Type
Headlights (low beam)
Discharge bulbs*
Halogen bulbs*
D4R
H11
35
55
A
B
Headlights (high beam)
9005
60
C
Front fog lights
9006
51
D
Front turn signal lights

21
E
Front side marker lights

5
F
Trunk light

5
G
Rear side marker lights

5
F
Stop/tail lights
7443
21/5
F
Tail lights
7443
5
F
Rear turn signal lights

21
E
Back-up lights
921
16
F
Outer foot lights

5
F
Vanity lights

8
F
Door courtesy lights

5
F
Front interior/personal lights

5
F
Rear interior light

5
G
6
Vehicle specifications
Bulb No.
*: If equipped
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
D4R discharge bulbs
H11 halogen bulbs
HB3 halogen bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Double end bulbs
495
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
496
6-1. Specifications
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
● Use only gasoline containing a maxi-
mum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
497
Vehicle specifications
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
6
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in
engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be
corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
498
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
6
Vehicle specifications
499
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 501)
(P. 501)
(P. 390)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is
a bias-ply tire.
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(P. 394)
(P. 493)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 395)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
(P. 466)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
500
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
6
Vehicle specifications
501
6-1. Specifications
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
502
6-1. Specifications
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
6
Vehicle specifications
503
6-1. Specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
504
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
505
6
Vehicle specifications
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
506
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
507
6
Vehicle specifications
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
508
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Meaning
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall
)
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
various designated seating capacities
509
Vehicle specifications
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
6
6-1. Specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
510
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
It is also possible to customize certain vehicle features yourself using the
navigation screen.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Settings that can be customized at a dealer
The following table includes some settings that can be customized using
the navigation system display. (P. 516)
Item
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 28)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart access system with
push-button start
ON
OFF
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
ON
OFF
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
ON
OFF
6
Vehicle specifications
511
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Wireless remote control
ON
OFF
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
ON
OFF
Unlocking operation
Automatic door lock
function to be activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
Wireless
remote control
(P. 40)
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
ON
OFF
Level 7
Level 0 to 7
Door lock buzzer
ON
OFF
Trunk unlocking function
ON
OFF
Operation signal (Buzzer
volume)
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold
Panic function
512
ON
Push twice
One push
OFF
6-2. Customization
Item
Default setting
Customized
setting
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
OFF
ON
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
OFF
ON
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors
ON
OFF
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors.
ON
OFF
Function
Unlocking using a key
Door lock
(P. 42)
Power windows
(P. 70)
OFF
Linked mechanical key
operation
Open and close
Wireless remote control
linked operation
OFF
Open only
Linked entry function
ON
OFF
Open only
Close only
6
Vehicle specifications
513
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Linked mechanical key
operation
Default setting
Customized
setting
OFF
Open and close
Open only
Close only
Linked operation of components when mechanical
key is used
Slide only
Tilt only
Wireless remote control
linked operation
OFF
Open only
Linked operation of components when wireless
remote control is used
Slide only
Tilt only
Linked entry function
ON
OFF
Eco Driving
Eco Driving Indicator
Indicator Light
Light
(P. 147)
ON
OFF
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Moon roof
(standard
type)
(P. 73)
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 149)
Lights
(P. 149)
Intuitive parking assist
(P. 176)
514
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
0 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Daytime running light system (USA only)
ON
OFF
Back sensor operation
display and buzzer
ON
OFF
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
4.5 ft. (150 cm)
1.8 ft. (60 cm)
Buzzer volume
Distance which a sensor
detects
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Time elapsed before lights
turn off
Illumination
(P. 312)
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 441)
Default setting
Customized
setting
OFF
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
ON
OFF
Operation after the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned OFF
ON
OFF
Front foot well lighting
ON
OFF
Outer foot light
ON
OFF
Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer
ON
OFF
Multi-information display (P. 144)
Country
Canada
Available languages
English and French
6
Vehicle specifications
515
6-2. Customization
Settings that can be customized using the navigation system display
You can customize the following settings using the navigation system display.
(For further information on customizing settings using the navigation system display, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)
Item
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 28)
Wireless
remote control
(P. 40)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart access system with
push-button start
ON
OFF
Driver’s door
All the doors
Smart door unlocking
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operating signal
(Emergency flashers)
ON
OFF
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
516
OFF
OFF
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
ON
OFF
6-2. Customization
Item
Default setting
Customized
setting
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
OFF
ON
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
OFF
ON
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors
ON
OFF
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors.
ON
OFF
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Function
Unlocking using a key
Door lock
(P. 42)
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 149)
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
Daytime running light system (USA only)
0 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
ON
6
OFF
Vehicle specifications
Lights
(P. 149)
Light sensor sensitivity
517
6-2. Customization
Item
Automatic air
conditioning
system
(P. 206)
Illumination
(P. 312)
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 441)
518
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Switching between outside air and recirculated
air mode linked to
“AUTO” switch operation
Auto
Manual
A/C Auto switch operation
Auto
Manual
Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity
Standard
-3 to 3
OFF
Time elapsed before lights
turn off
15 seconds
Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for dimming the meter lights etc.
Standard
-2 to 2
Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for
brightening the meter
lights etc.
Standard
-2 to 2
Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer
ON
OFF
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the battery, the following items must be initialized for normal system operation.
Item
When to initialize
Reference
Maintenance data
(USA only)
After the maintenance is performed
P. 365
Tire pressure warning
system
When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or
load weight, etc.
P. 392
6
Vehicle specifications
519
6-3. Initialization
520
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 522
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 523
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 525
521
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
522
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)
523
7
For owners
Si la sangle diagonale est proche
du cou de la personne, faites
coulisser le guide de confort de
ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
524
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions
in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables frontaux
Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur/sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant.
7
For owners
525
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux et rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants des
sièges avant et arrière extérieures.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants
assis aux places extérieures.
526
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
Capteur de position du siège
conducteur
Sacs de sécurité gonflables de
genoux
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité passager
avant
Boîtier électronique de sacs de
sécurité gonflables
Système de détection du
passager
(calculateur
électronique et capteurs)
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables frontaux
7
For owners
Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
rideau
Témoins indicateurs AIR BAG
ON et AIR BAG OFF
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux passagers avant
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables latéraux et rideau
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux passagers arrière
extérieurs
Voyant SRS
Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur
527
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SECURITE GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de
sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208).
Le système de sacs de sécurité gonflables régule la puissance de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables conducteur et passager
avant. Le système de sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur comprend le
capteur de position du siège conducteur, etc. Le système de sac de
sécurité gonflable passager avant comprend le capteur de classification
des occupants du siège passager avant, etc.
Les principaux éléments du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
sont illustrés ci-dessus. Le système des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
est commandé par un boîtier électronique. Ce boîtier intègre un capteur
de sécurité et un capteur de sac de sécurité gonflable.
Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latéral l'exige, le système de sacs
de sécurité gonflables SRS déclenche les dispositifs pyrotechniques de
gonflage (générateurs de gaz). Le déploiement rapide des sacs de
sécurité gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans
les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant
d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
528
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence
considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le conducteur se
trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la
sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration) conseille:
La zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se situant dans les
premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une
confortable marge de sécurité en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre sac de
sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du
volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes actuellement assis à moins de 10 in.
(250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de différentes
façons:
529
7
For owners
• Reculez votre siège au maximum tout en atteignant confortablement les
pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que la conception des véhicules
soit variable, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de
10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, en
inclinant simplement un peu le dossier du siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à
voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et
antidérapant pour vous rehausser, ou si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage
en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour
effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre poitrine
plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des commandes du tableau
de bord.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture
de sécurité à la boucle du siège
conducteur, mais pas à la ceinture de
sécurité proprement dite, le système de
sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur
pense que vous avez attaché votre ceinture
de sécurité, alors qu'en fait c'est faux. Dans
ce cas, il se peut que le sac de sécurité
gonflable conducteur ne se déploie pas
correctement en cas d'accident, et vous
risquez d'être tué ou grièvement blessé.
Veillez donc à porter la ceinture de
sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec
une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le
passager se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. Éloignez le siège
passager au maximum du sac de sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège
de telle sorte que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans son siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés
peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité
gonflable. Installez les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de
sécurité dans un siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement
d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants aux places arrière du véhicule et de
prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. C'est à l'arrière que les
nourrissons et les enfants sont les mieux protégés.
● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège
passager avant, même si le témoin “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d'accident,
par la violence et la vitesse de son déploiement, le sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant peut blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous l'avez installé à
la place du passager avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route.
530
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et
ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de
bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS
passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les
genoux du passager avant.
● Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec quelque
chose sur les genoux, et n'autorisez pas
non plus le passager à voyager avec
quelque chose sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur le
siège passager et se pencher vers la porte,
ou mettre sa tête ou ses mains à l'extérieur
du véhicule.
7
For owners
531
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur le
tableau de bord, la garniture centrale du
moyeu de volant de direction ou la partie
inférieure du tableau de bord.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant
et genoux, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
● Ne fixez aucun objet sur les portes, la vitre
de pare-brise, les vitres latérales, les
montants avant et arrière, le rail latéral de
toit et la poignée de maintien.
● Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements
aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet dur. En cas
de déploiement du sac de sécurité
gonflable SRS rideau, ces objets peuvent
se transformer en projectiles capables de
vous blesser grièvement, voire de vous
tuer.
● Si la zone de déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable SRS genoux est
recouverte par une protection en vinyle, retirez celle-ci.
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement
des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d'en gêner le
déploiement.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties
renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, illustrées
P. 533.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils sont
alors encore très chauds.
532
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité
gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant et la garniture de montant avant, apparaissent
abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes.
Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de
se déclencher (déployer) accidentellement, ce qui pourrait risquer de vous tuer ou
blesser grièvement.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité gonflables
SRS
● Réparations, modifications, dépose ou remplacement du volant, du combiné
d'instruments, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des
montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs de
l'habitacle
● Installation d'un chasse-neige, d'un treuil, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle, pare-
kangourou, etc.)
● Modification des suspensions du véhicule
● Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur ou d'un
lecteur CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne
7
atteinte d'un handicap physique
For owners
533
534
Index
Abbreviation list ..................... 536
Alphabetical index..................538
What to do if... ........................550
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding
the equipment listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation system
Audio/video system
Air conditioning
Climate control
Rear view monitor system
Intuitive parking assist
535
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
A/C
Air Conditioning
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
AFS
Adaptive Front lighting System
AI-SHIFT
Artificial Intelligence Shift
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS
Child Restraint System
DISP
Display
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event data recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M
Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
PCS
Pre-Collision System
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
536
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
537
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C* ..........................................................206
ABS..............................................................183
Adaptive front lighting system ...........151
AFS ................................................................151
Air conditioning filter ......................... 405
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter .......................405
Automatic air conditioning
system*................................................206
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.............91
Airbag precautions for your
child..........................................................95
Airbag warning light ........................440
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions.............................................. 92
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ..........................................95
Front passenger occupant
classification system....................... 100
General airbag precautions ...........95
Locations of airbags............................88
Modification and disposal of
airbags.................................................... 99
Proper driving posture .............86, 95
Side airbag operating
conditions.............................................. 92
Side airbag precautions ....................95
SRS airbags .............................................88
538
Alarm............................................................83
Antenna......................................................221
Anti-lock brake system....................... 183
Armrest .................................................... 332
Ashtray...................................................... 325
Audio input.............................................. 256
Audio system*
Antenna.....................................................221
Audio input........................................... 256
AUX port.............................................. 256
CD player/changer..........................224
iPod .......................................................... 238
MP3/WMA disc................................. 231
Optimal use ......................................... 254
Portable music player..................... 256
Radio ..........................................................217
Steering wheel audio switch.........257
USB memory ...................................... 245
USB port ................................... 238, 245
Automatic air conditioning
system*..................................................206
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................152
Automatic light control system.........149
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission ................... 132
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P....................................472
S mode ..................................................... 133
AUX port................................................. 256
Auxiliary box ............................................321
Alphabetical index
B Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 420
Wattage .................................................495
Battery
Checking............................................... 387
If the vehicle battery is
discharged .........................................477
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................196
Bluetooth® audio* .............................. 260
Bluetooth® phone*..............................279
Brake
Fluid..........................................................384
Parking brake........................................136
Brake assist ..............................................183
Break-in tips ...............................................121
C Care
Exterior................................................... 358
Interior ...................................................... 361
Seat belts................................................362
Cargo capacity....................................... 192
Cargo hooks.......................................... 338
CD changer*.......................................... 224
CD player* .............................................. 224
Chains ........................................................198
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition ..................105
Booster seats, installation ................. 112
Convertible seats, definition..........105
Convertible seats, installation......... 112
Front passenger occupant
classification system.......................100
Infant seats, definition........................105
Infant seats, installation ....................... 112
Installing CRS with lower
anchorages...........................................110
Installing CRS with seat belts.......... 112
Installing CRS with top straps.........115
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
539
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions..............................95
Battery precautions............. 388, 479
Child restraint system....................... 105
Child-protectors................................... 43
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 62
Installing child restraints .................. 109
Moon roof precautions ......................77
Power window lock switch.............. 70
Power window precautions.............72
Removed electronic key
battery precautions...................... 408
Seat belt comfort guide.....................60
Seat belt extender precautions ..... 64
Seat belt precautions.......................... 62
Seat heater precautions ...... 328, 331
Trunk precautions ................................48
Child-protectors ......................................43
Cigarette lighter....................................326
540
Cleaning
Exterior...................................................358
Interior.......................................................361
Seat belts ................................................362
Clock ......................................................... 324
Coat hooks..............................................336
Compass.................................................. 346
Condenser ..............................................384
Console box .............................................317
Cooling system
Engine overheating..........................480
Cornering assist sensors.....................176
Cruise control
Cruise control.......................................160
Dynamic radar cruise control....... 164
Cup holders..............................................319
Curtain shield airbags ...........................88
Customizable features..........................511
Alphabetical index
D Daytime running light system............152
Defogger
Rear window.......................................... 213
Side mirror.............................................. 213
Dimension ............................................... 486
Dinghy towing ....................................... 203
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control.......164
Trip information....................................145
Warning message ............................ 449
Do-it-yourself maintenance............. 370
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights .......................... 312
Wattage .................................................495
Doors
Door lock ................................28, 40, 42
Door windows....................................... 70
Side mirrors............................................. 68
Driver's seat belt reminder light ...... 441
Driving
Break-in tips.............................................121
Correct posture.................................... 86
Procedures.............................................120
Winter driving tips ..............................196
Driving position memory .......................51
E Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................474
Emergency, in case of
If a warning message is
displayed.............................................449
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................474
If the engine will not start................470
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ................................... 472
If the vehicle battery is
discharged......................................... 477
If the warning buzzer sounds ......439
If the warning light turns on...........439
If you have a flat tire .......................... 461
If you lose your keys.........................473
If you think something is
wrong ...................................................437
If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 483
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency......... 484
If your vehicle needs to be
towed..................................................... 431
If your vehicle overheats ...............480
541
Alphabetical index
Emergency flashers
Switch ......................................................430
Engine
Compartment ......................................377
Engine switch.........................................128
Hood........................................................ 374
How to start the engine....................128
Identification number.......................487
If the engine will not start ...............470
Ignition switch........................................128
Overheating........................................ 480
Engine compartment cover .............378
Engine coolant
Capacity.................................................490
Checking ...............................................382
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................196
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................................138
Engine immobilizer system................... 81
Engine oil
Capacity.................................................489
Checking ............................................... 379
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................196
Event data recorder ...............................20
F
542
Floor mat ..................................................337
Fluid
Brake........................................................384
Power steering fluid .........................385
Washer...................................................389
Fog lights
Switch ........................................................154
Wattage..................................................495
Foot well lighting.....................................312
Front fog lights
Switch........................................................154
Wattage ................................................. 495
Front passenger occupant
classification system.......................... 100
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light .......................................441
Front seats
Adjustment .............................................. 50
Driving position memory ................... 51
Seat position memory........................ 55
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 420
Wattage ................................................. 495
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 420
Wattage ................................................. 495
Fuel
Capacity ................................................488
Fuel gauge..............................................138
Fuel pump shut off system............ 438
Gas station information ................. 552
Information ........................................... 496
Refueling....................................................78
Fuel door..................................................... 78
Fuel filler door........................................... 78
Fuel pump shut off system.................438
Fuses ..........................................................409
G Garage door opener..........................340
Gas station information .....................552
Gauges...................................................... 138
Glove box..................................................316
Glove box light........................................316
Grocery bag hooks.............................338
Alphabetical index
H Hands-free phone system
(for mobile phone)*
Bluetooth® ............................................279
Hands-free phone system
(for mobile phone).........................279
Hazard lights
Switch......................................................430
Head restraints
Adjusting ..................................................57
Headlight aim ..........................................418
Headlights
Discharge headlights
precautions ....................................... 428
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 420
Switch........................................................149
Wattage .................................................495
Heaters
Seat heaters..............................328, 330
Side mirror.............................................. 213
Hood ..........................................................374
Hooks
Cargo hooks .......................................338
Grocery bag hooks.........................338
Horn............................................................. 137
I
I/M test......................................................369
Identification number
Engine......................................................487
Vehicle ....................................................487
Ignition switch.......................................... 128
Illuminated entry system ..................... 312
Indicator lights......................................... 140
Initialization
Items to initialize .................................. 519
Inside rear view mirror ..........................66
Interior lights
Interior lights.......................................... 314
Switch........................................................ 314
Wattage................................................. 495
Intuitive parking assist...........................176
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack....................375
Vehicle-equipped jack .................... 461
Jack handle............................................... 461
K Keyless entry .............................................40
Keys
Electronic key .........................................26
Engine switch........................................ 128
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................474
If you lose your keys.........................473
Key number .............................................26
Keyless entry ...........................................40
Keys .............................................................26
Mechanical key......................................26
Wireless remote control key ..........40
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
543
Alphabetical index
L
Light bulbs
Replacing...............................................420
Wattage..................................................495
Lights
Door courtesy lights...........................312
Emergency flasher switch .............430
Fog light switch.....................................154
Hazard light switch...........................430
Headlights switch ................................149
Interior light switch..............................314
Outer foot lights...................................312
Personal light switch ..........................314
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Shift lever lighting ................................312
Turn signal lever...................................135
Vanity lights .......................................... 323
Wattage..................................................495
Load capacity .......................................... 195
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance .........370
General maintenance .....................366
Maintenance data..............................486
Maintenance requirements ..........364
Maintenance data.................................365
Meter
Instrument panel light control .......139
Meters ...................................................... 138
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror....................... 66
Side mirror heater...............................213
Side mirrors.............................................68
Vanity mirrors...................................... 323
Moon roof................................................... 73
MP3 disc*................................................. 231
Multi-information display ................... 144
544
N Noise from under vehicle ......................18
O Odometer ................................................ 138
Oil
Engine oil................................................379
Opener
Fuel filler door .........................................78
Hood ........................................................374
Trunk............................................................46
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights................................... 312
Wattage ................................................. 495
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding......................... 68
Mirror position memory..................... 51
Outside temperature display ............146
Overhead console................................ 318
Overheating, Engine ..........................480
P Parking assist sensors...........................176
Parking brake...........................................136
Parking lights
Switch........................................................ 149
Wattage ................................................. 495
PCS............................................................. 188
Personal lights
Switch........................................................ 314
Wattage ................................................. 495
Power outlet ........................................... 327
Power steering fluid ............................385
Power windows........................................ 70
Pre-collision system ............................. 188
Alphabetical index
R Radar cruise control .............................164
Radiator.................................................... 384
Radio* ......................................................... 217
Radio data system*................................218
RDS*............................................................218
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 420
Wattage .................................................495
Rear sunshade....................................... 333
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 420
Wattage .................................................495
Rear window defogger........................213
Replacing
Electronic key battery ..................... 407
Fuses........................................................409
Light bulbs ............................................ 420
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners ..........................................522
S Safety Connect..................................... 350
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................60
Automatic Locking Retractor...........61
Child restraint system
installation............................................109
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts .....................................362
Emergency Locking Retractor ........61
How to wear your seat belt .............59
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................62
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use ...........................61
Reminder light .......................................441
Seat belt extenders ..............................62
Seat belt pretensioners ......................60
Seat heaters ................................328, 330
Seat position memory............................55
Seat ventilators ......................................330
Seating capacity..................................... 195
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
545
Alphabetical index
Seats
Adjustment...............................................50
Adjustment precautions....................50
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ........................... 109
Cleaning...................................................361
Driver’s seat position memory.........51
Front passenger seat position
memory..................................................55
Head restraint......................................... 57
Properly sitting in the seat................86
Seat heaters............................. 328, 330
Ventilated seats..................................330
Service reminder indicators ............. 140
Shift lever
Automatic transmission....................132
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P....................................472
Shift lever lighting .................................. 312
Shift lock system.................................... 472
Side airbags............................................... 88
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Switch ........................................................149
Wattage..................................................495
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding .........................68
Mirror position memory .....................51
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function.......................................... 28
Starting the engine..............................128
546
“SOS” button..........................................350
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ............................... 399
Storage location .................................. 461
Spark plug .................................................491
Specifications.........................................486
Speedometer .......................................... 138
Steering wheel
Audio switches*..................................257
Power adjustment................................ 65
Steering wheel position
memory ................................................... 51
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 420
Wattage ................................................. 495
Storage feature ...................................... 315
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 483
Sun visors................................................. 322
Sunshade
Rear.......................................................... 333
Roof..............................................................75
Switch
Emergency flasher switch............. 430
Engine switch ........................................128
Fog light switch ....................................154
Hazard light switch .......................... 430
Ignition switch .......................................128
Light switches........................................ 149
Power door lock switch.....................42
Power window switch ........................70
Window lock switch............................70
Wiper and washer switch...............156
Alphabetical index
T
Tachometer ..............................................138
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 420
Switch........................................................149
Wattage .................................................495
Talk switch*............................................. 284
Telephone switch*............................... 284
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.......................................................... 83
Engine immobilizer system ...............81
Tire inflation pressure......................... 399
Tire information
Glossary ................................................504
Size ............................................................ 501
Tire identification number .............. 501
Uniform tire quality grading.........502
Tires
Chains.......................................................198
Checking...............................................390
If you have a flat tire............................461
Inflation pressure ...............................399
Inflation pressure sensor..................391
Information............................................ 499
Replacing.................................................461
Rotating tires........................................390
Size ........................................................... 493
Snow tires..............................................200
Spare tire .................................................461
Tools ............................................................461
Total load capacity.................................195
Towing
Dinghy towing .....................................203
Emergency towing............................. 431
Trailer towing .......................................202
TRAC..........................................................183
Traction control......................................183
Trip meter .................................................138
Trunk
Extending a space............................ 335
Opener ......................................................46
Trunk light
Trunk light................................................. 47
Wattage................................................. 495
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Switch........................................................ 135
Wattage................................................. 495
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
547
Alphabetical index
U USB port* .................................... 238, 245
V Vanity lights
Vanity lights .......................................... 323
Wattage..................................................495
Vanity mirrors ........................................323
Vehicle identification number .........487
Vehicle stability control.......................183
Ventilators .............................................. 330
Voice command switch* ...................284
VSC.............................................................183
548
W Warning buzzers
Brake system....................................... 439
Downshifting.......................................... 134
Open door ............................................ 441
Seat belt reminder .............................. 441
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system .................. 440
Brake assist system .......................... 440
Brake system....................................... 439
Charging system............................... 440
Low fuel level......................................... 441
Low tire pressure warning
light.......................................................... 441
Malfunction indicator lamp .......... 440
Master warning light.......................... 441
Open door............................................. 441
Pre-collision system......................... 440
Pretensioners ...................................... 440
Seat belt reminder light.................... 441
SRS airbags.......................................... 440
Alphabetical index
Warning messages
Dynamic radar
cruise control .......................450, 452
Engine oil level.................................... 452
Engine oil maintenance.................. 452
Engine oil pressure........................... 449
Hood ....................................................... 452
Intuitive parking assist
sensor ......................................450, 452
Moon roof............................................. 452
Open door ........................................... 452
Parking brake...................................... 452
Pre-collision system.............450, 452
Smart access system with
push-button start............................458
Steering lock........................................450
Trunk........................................................ 452
Washer fluid......................................... 452
Washer
Checking .............................................. 389
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 196
Switch........................................................ 156
Washing and waxing.......................... 358
Weight
Cargo capacity.....................................192
Load limits .............................................. 195
Weight.................................................... 486
Wheels ......................................................403
Window glasses ......................................70
Window lock switch ...............................70
Windows
Power windows.....................................70
Rear window defogger.....................213
Washer .................................................... 156
Windshield wipers
Position..................................................... 199
Windshield wipers ............................. 156
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery.......................407
Wireless remote control key ..........40
WMA disc* .............................................. 231
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
549
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 461
If you have a flat tire
P. 470 If the engine will not start
The engine does not start
P. 81
Engine immobilizer system
P. 477 If the vehicle battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 472
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 480 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
550
The key is lost
P. 473 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 477 If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 42
Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 83
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 483 If the vehicle becomes stuck
What to do if...
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 439
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
or
Malfunction indicator lamp
or
P. 439
P. 440
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
ABS warning light
or
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 440
Low fuel level warning light
P. 441
SRS warning light
P. 441
or
P. 441
Master warning light
P. 440
Open door warning light
P. 441
Charging system warning
light
P. 440
P. 441
Pre-collision system warning light
P. 440
Tire pressure warning light
P. 441
551
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 374
Hood lock release lever
P. 374
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference)
Engine oil type
552
Trunk opener
P. 46
Fuel filler door opener
P. 78
Fuel filler door
P. 78
Tire inflation pressure
P. 493
18.5 gal. (70L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 79, 488
P. 493
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
Without filter
6.0 (5.7, 5.0)
With filter
6.4 (6.1, 5.3)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
P. 489
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement